1. Home
  2. LG Electronics
  3. LG Electronics 47LE7500 User Manual

47LE7500 Lcd Tv - Televisions - - Lg Electronics Australia

Product's Documents

Below are documents related to this product, you can read online or download:
Main documentSpecificationQuestions and answersRelateds Products
47LE7500 photo

More photos

User Manual

This is the main product document for model 47LE7500.

The file format is pdf, 242 pages, you can download this manual here .

background
www.lg.com
OWNER’S MANUAL
LCD TV / LED LCD TV
Please read this manual carefully before operating
your set and retain it for future reference.
background
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
Wireless Media Box
(AN-WL100W)
IN 4
AV1 AV2
COM1 COM2 RGB WIRELESS
A
R
L(MONO)
AUDIO
VIDEO
B
1
2
SERVICE ONLY
3
RGB IN (PC)
AUDIO IN
RS-232C IN
RGB/DVI
SERVICE ONLY
IR BLASTER
A
B
COMPONENT / AV IN 1
COMPONENT / AV IN 2
R
L(MONO)
AUDIO
VIDEO
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
DC IN 12V
HDMI1 HDMI2
HDMI3
HDMI4
L
R
L
R
/ DVI IN
Wireless LAN for
Broadband/
DLNA Adaptor
(AN-WF100)
(Only 32/42/46/52/60LD5**,
32/37/42/47/55LD6**,
32/37/42/47/55LE53**,
32/37/42/47/55LE55**,
32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***,
32/42LE45**, 42/47/55LX6***,
47/55LX9***, 32LE3***)
(Only 32/42/52LD56*,
32/37/42/47/55LD6**,
32/37/42/47/55LE55**,
32/37/42/47/55LE7***,
42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***,
47/55LX9***)
Optional extras can be changed or modified for quality improvement without any notification.
Contact your dealer for buying these items.
This device only works with compatible LG LED LCD TV or LCD TV.
Wall Mounting Bracket
Separate purchase
(22/26/32LD3
**
,
32LD4
**
, 32LD5
**
, 32LD6
**
,
22/26/32LE5
***
,
32LE7
***, 22/26LE6***,
32LE4***, 26/32LE3***
)
LSW100B or
LSW100BG
(37/42/47LD4
**
,
42/46LD5
**
, 37/42/47LD6
**
,
37/42/47LE5
***,
37/42/47LE7
*** ,
42/47LE8
***, 42/47LE4***,
42/47LX6***
)
LSW200B or
LSW200BG
(52/60LD5
**
, 55LD6
**
,
55LE5
***,
55LE7
***,
55LE8
***, 55LE4***,
55LX6***, 55LX9***
)
LSW400B or
LSW400BG or
DSW400B or
DSW400BG
OUT
WIRELESS
CONTROL
(47LX9***)
LSW200BX or
LSW200BXG
background
I
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
PREPARATION
Accessories .....................................................A-1
Front Panel Controls ....................................... A-4
Back Panel Information .................................A-10
Stand Installation ...........................................A-18
Woofer Installation :When Using the Wall Mount A-23
Back Cover for Wire Arrangement ................A-24
Attaching the TV to a Desk ...........................A-25
Not Using the Desk-Type Stand ...................A-26
Swivel Stand .................................................A-26
Positioning your Display ................................A-26
Connection of TV ..........................................A-27
Kensington Security System .........................A-27
Careful Installation Advice .............................A-28
Desktop Pedestal Installation ........................A-28
Wall Mount: Horizontal Installation ................A-29
Remote Control Key Functions .....................A-30
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Antenna Connection ............................................1
Connecting with a Component Cable .................2
Connecting with an HDMI Cable.........................3
Connecting with an HDMI to DVI Cable .............4
Connecting with an RCA Cable ..........................5
Connecting with an RF Cable .............................6
Headphone Setup ...............................................6
Digital Audio Out Setup .......................................7
Connecting with a D-sub 15 Pin Cable ...............8
Usb Setup ...........................................................8
External Equipment Wireless Connection ..........9
Supported Display Resolution ...........................10
Screen Setup for PC mode ...............................12
Network Setup ...................................................16
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CON-
TROL
Turning on the TV .............................................26
Initializing Setup ...............................................26
Programme Selection ........................................26
Volume Adjustment ...........................................26
Quick Menu .......................................................27
On Screen Menus Selection and Adjustment ...28
Auto Programme Tuning ...................................30
Manual Programme Tuning ...............................31
Programme Edit ...............................................34
Software Update ...............................................38
Picture/Sound Test ............................................42
Signal Test .........................................................43
Product/Service Information ..............................44
Network Test ......................................................45
Simple Manual ..................................................46
Selecting the Programme List ...........................47
Input List ............................................................49
Input Label ........................................................50
Data Service ......................................................51
SIMPLINK ..........................................................52
AV Mode ............................................................55
Initializing(Reset to original factory settings) ....56
NETCAST
Legal Notice ......................................................57
Netcast Menu ....................................................59
Movie Online .....................................................60
Weather info ......................................................62
Photo Album ......................................................63
TO USE THE BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth? ........................................................64
Setting the Bluetooth .........................................65
Bluetooth headset ............................................66
Remove the Bluetooth device ...........................69
My Bluetooth Information ..................................70
Receiving photos from external Bluetooth device 71
Listening to the Musics from external Bluetooth
device ................................................................71
3D IMAGING
3D TECHNOLOGY ...........................................72
Viewing 3D Imaging ..........................................72
When using 3D Glasses ...................................73
3D Imaging viewing range ................................73
Watching 3D Imaging ........................................74
TO USE A USB DEVICE
When connecting a USB device .......................76
DLNA .................................................................78
Movie list ...........................................................82
Photo list ............................................................93
Music list ..........................................................100
DivX Registration Code ...................................106
Deactivation .....................................................107
background
II
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
GAME
Game ...............................................................108
EPG(ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME
GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE)
Switch on/off EPG ...........................................110
Select a programme ........................................110
Button Function in NOW/NEXT Guide Mode .110
Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode ........... 111
Button Function in Date Change Mode .......... 111
Button Function in Extended Description Box 112
Button Function in Remind Setting Mode .......112
Button Function in Schedule List Mode ..........112
MHEG (MULTIMEDIA AND
HYPERMEDIA INFORMATION CODING
EXPERT GROUP)(IN DIGITAL MODE)
Teletext within Digital Service .........................113
Teletext in Digital Service ................................113
Switch on MHEG ............................................114
Select a Programme .......................................114
Button Function in Listing Mode .....................115
Button Function in NOW/NEXT Mode ............115
PICTURE CONTROL
Picture Size (Aspect Ratio) Control ................116
Picture Wizard .................................................118
Energy Saving .................................................119
Preset Picture Settings ...................................120
Manual Picture Adjustment .............................121
Picture Improvement Technology ....................123
Expert Picture Control .....................................124
Picture Reset ...................................................127
Trumotion ........................................................128
LED Local Dimming ........................................129
Power Indicator ...............................................130
Mode Setting ...................................................131
Demo Mode .....................................................132
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
Auto Volume Leveler .......................................133
Clear Voice II ...................................................134
Preset Sound Settings-Sound Mode ..............135
Sound Setting Adjustment -User Mode ..........136
Infinite Sound ..................................................136
Balance ...........................................................137
TV Speakers On/ Off Setup ............................138
DTV Audio Setting (in digital mode only) ........139
Selecting Digital Audio out ..............................140
Audio Reset .....................................................141
I/II
Stereo/Dual Reception (In Analogue Mode Only) 142
NICAM Reception (In Analogue Mode Only) ..143
Speaker Sound Output Selection ...................143
On-Screen Menu Language / Country Selection 144
Language Selection (In digital mode only) .....145
TIME SETTING
Clock Setup .....................................................147
Auto on/off time setting ...................................148
Sleep Timer setting .........................................149
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
Set Password & Lock System.........................150
Block Programme ............................................151
Parental Control (In Digital Mode only) ...........152
External Input Blocking ...................................153
Key Lock..........................................................154
TELETEXT
Switch on/off ...................................................155
SIMPLE Text....................................................155
TOP Text..........................................................156
FASTEXT ........................................................156
Special Teletext Functions ..............................157
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting ...............................................158
Maintenance ....................................................160
Product Specifications .....................................161
IR Codes .........................................................175
External Control Device Setup ........................176
Open Source Software Notice ........................183
background
A-1
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV. If an accessory is missing, please
contact the dealer where you purchased the TV.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Owner’s Manual
Batteries
(AAA)
Remote Control
Polishing Cloth
Polishing cloth for
use on the screen.
This item is not included for all models.
* Lightly wipe any stains
or fingerprints on the
surface of the TV with
the polishing cloth.
Do not use excessive
force. This may cause
scratching or discoloura-
tion.
M4X20
M4X20
x 8
Only 22LD3**
Cable Tie
(Refer to p. A-24)
Protection Cover
(Refer to p. A-26)
Only 26/32LD3**
(M4 X 20)
1-screw for stand fixing
(Refer to p. A-25)
(Only 26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LD4**,
32/42LD5**, 32/37/42LD6**, 32LE45**,
32/42/47/55LE46**, 32LE5***, 32LE7***,
32LE3***)
ACCESSORIES
Protection Cover
(Refer to p. A-26)
Bolts for stand assembly
(Refer to p. A-18)
Power Cord
(Except for 32/37/42/47/55LE5***,
32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***,
42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***,
32/42/47/55LE4***, 32LE3***)
background
A-2
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Only 32/37/42/47LD4**
Bolts for stand assembly
(Refer to p. A-18)
x 8
(M4 X 20)
Protection Cover
(Refer to p. A-26)
x 8
Only 32/42/46/52/60LD5**
(M4 X 20)
Bolts for stand assembly
(Refer to p. A-18)
Only 22/26LE53**, 26LE3***
AC/DC Adaptor
(Refer to p.
A-27)
4-Ring spacers
(Only 26LE53
**,
26LE3***
)
(Refer to p. A-27)
Bolts for stand assembly
(Refer to p. A-19)
(M4x14)
x 4
(M4x20)
(Only 26LE53
**,
26LE3***
)
x 4
Protection Cover
(Refer to p. A-26)
Cable Holder
(Refer to p. A-25)
Nero MediaHome
4 Essentials CD
(Only 32/42/52LD56*)
x 2
x 2
Woofer Pemnut
(Refer to p. A-23)
Woofer Fixing
Screw
(Refer to p. A-23)
(Only 32/42/47/55LE46**)
Cable Holder
(Refer to p. A-25)
Only 32/37/42/47/55LE53**, 32/42/47/55LE4***, 32LE3***
Component gender cable,
AV gender cable
x 2
Bolts for stand assembly (Refer to p. A-19 or A-22)
(M4x26)
(Only
47/55LE53
**
)
x 4
(M4x16)
x 4
(M4x22)
(Only 32LE53**,
32LE45**,
32/42/47/
55LE46**,
32LE3***)
x 4
(M4x24)
(Only
37/42LE53**,
42LE45**)
x 4
background
A-3
PREPARATION
Protection cover
(Refer to p. A-26)
Only 32/37/42/47/55LD6**
Nero MediaHome
4 Essentials CD
Only 32/37/42/47/55LE55**, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***
Bolts for stand assembly
(Refer to p. A-20)
x 8
(M4 x 16)
(Only 32/37/42/47LE55
**
,
32/37/42/47LE7
***,
42/47LX6***)
x 8
(M4 x 20)
(Only 42/47/55LE8
***
)
x 4x 4
(M4 x 16)(M4 x 24)
(Only 55LE55
**
,
55LE7
***,
55LX6***)
Bolts for stand assembly
(Refer to p. A-18)
(M4x20)
x 8
Cable Holder
(Refer to p. A-25)
Nero MediaHome
4 Essentials CD
Slightly wipe stained spot on the exterior only with
the cleansing cloths(mitt) for the product exterior if
there is stain or fingerprint on surface of the exterior.
For cleaning front frame, please slowly wipe in one
direction after spraying water 1~2 times on cleansing
cloths. Please remove excessive moisture after cleaning.
Excessive moisture may cause water stains on the frame.
(Only 32/37/42/47/55LE7
***
)
cleansing cloths(mitt)
Component gender cable,
AV gender cable
x 2
M4x12
M4x22
M4X20
M4X20
(Only 47/55LX9***)
Bolts for stand assembly
(Refer to p. A-21)
M4X20
M4X20
x 4
x 4
3D Glasses
(AG-S100)
(Only 42/47/55LX6
***
)
(Only 47/55LX9***)
x 2
Only 22/26LE6***
Cable Tie
(Refer to p. A-24)
Bolts for stand assembly
(Refer to p. A-21)
x 2
(M4x16)
AC/DC Adaptor
(Refer to p.
A-27)
3D Glasses
(AG-S100)
Stand Rear Cover
background
A-4
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
P
OK
MENU
INPUT
INPUT
MENU
OK
P
INPUT
MENU
OK
P
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
NOTE
►
TV can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. And TV should
be switched off using the power switch on the TV if it will not be watched for some time, as this
will reduce energy consumption.
► The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of brightness of the picture
is reduced, and this will reduce the overall running cost.
CAUTION
► Do not step on the glass stand or subject it to any impact. It may break, causing possible injury from frag-
ments of glass, or the TV may fall.
► Do not drag the TV. The floor or the product may be damaged.
P
OK
MENU
INPUT
INPUT
MENU
OK
P
INPUT
MENU
OK
P
PROGRAMME
VOLUME
OK
MENU
INPUT
POWER
P
OK
MENU
INPUT
INPUT
MENU
OK
P
INPUT
MENU
OK
P
PROGRAMMEVOLUME
OKMENU
INPUTPOWER
Only 22LD3**
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power
Indicator in the OPTION menu.)
Remote Control Sensor
P
OK
MENU
INPUT
INPUT
MENU
OK
P
INPUT
MENU
OK
P
Only 26/32LD3**
SPEAKER
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
Only 22/26/32LD3**
background
A-5
PREPARATION
INPUT
MENU
OK
P
INPUT
MENU
OK
P
PROGRAMME
VOLUME
OK
MENU
INPUT
POWER
SPEAKER
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power
Indicator in the OPTION menu.)
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions.
Remote Control Sensor
Only 32/42/46/52/60LD5**
OK
P
MENU
INPUT
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
OK
P
MENU
INPUT
PROGRAMME
VOLUME
OK
MENU
INPUT
POWER
OK
P
MENU
INPUT
Remote Control Sensor
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power
Indicator in the OPTION menu.)
SPEAKER
Only 32/37/42/47LD4**
background
A-6
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
INPUT
MENU
OK
P
SPEAKER
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power Indicator in the
OPTION menu.)
Remote Control Sensor
INPUT
MENU
OK
P
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions.
INPUT
MENU
OK
P
PROGRAMME
VOLUME
OK
MENU
INPUT
POWER
Only 32/37/42/47/55LD6**
P
OK
INPUT
MENU
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
SPEAKER
P
OK
INPUT
MEN
U
Remote Control Sensor
P
OK
INPUT
MENU
OKPROGRAMME
INPUT
VOLUME MENU POWER
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the
Power Indicator in the
OPTION menu.)
Only 22/26LE53**, 26LE3***
background
A-7
PREPARATION
INPUT
MENU
P
OK
SPEAKER
Remote Control Sensor
INPUT
MENU
P
OK
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions.
INPUT
MENU
P
OK
PROGRAMME
VOLUME
MENU
POWER
INPUTOK
Touch Sensor
• You can use the desired button function by touching.
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power
Indicator in the OPTION menu.)
Emitter (Only 42/47/55LX6
***
)
It is the part equipped with the emitter
exchanging signal with 3D glasses.
Please be careful not to block
the screen with objects or people
while watching a 3D Video.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Only 32/37/42/47/55LE5***, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LX6***, 32LE3***
OKP MENU INPUT
Only 22/26LE6***
OKP MENU INPUT
Remote Control Sensor
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power
Indicator in the OPTION menu.)
SPEAKER
OKP MENU INPUT
INPUTOK
MENU
POWER
PROGRAMME
VOLUME
background
A-8
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Only 42/47/55LE8***
INPUT
MENU
P
OK
SPEAKER
Remote Control Sensor
INPUT
MENU
P
OK
INPUT
MENU
P
OK
INPUT
OK
MENU
POWER
Touch Sensor
• You can use the desired button function by touching.
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power Indicator in the OPTION
menu.)
PROGRAMME
VOLUME
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions.
P
OK
INPUT
MENU
Only 32/42/47/55LE4***
P
OK
INPUT
MENU
PROGRAMME
VOLUME
OK
MENU
INPUT
POWER
Remote Control Sensor
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions.
Woofer
(Only 32/42/47/55LE46**)
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power
Indicator in the OPTION menu.)
SPEAKER
background
A-9
PREPARATION
SPEAKER
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions.
Remote Control Sensor
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power Indicator
in the OPTION menu.)
P
OK
INPUT
MENU
INPUT
PROGRAMME
VOLUME
OK
MENU
INPUT
POWER
Only 47/55LX9***
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Emitter
It is the part equipped with the
emitter exchanging signal with 3D
glasses.
Please be careful not to block
the screen with objects or
people while watching a 3D
Video.
background
A-10
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Power Cord Socket
This TV operates on an AC power. The volt-
age is indicated on the Specifications page.
(► p.161 to 173) Never attempt to operate
the TV on DC power.
HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to
HDMI cable.
RGB IN Input
Connect the output from a PC.
RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of
equipment.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
Audio/Video Input
Connect audio/video output from an external
device to these jacks.
Component Input
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
Antenna / Cable Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
SERVICE ONLY PORT
Headphone Socket
Plug the headphone into the headphone
socket.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
K
AC-IN
1
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
ANTENNA /
CABEL IN
/DVI IN
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
H/P
AUDIO
L(MONO)
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
COMPONENT IN
AV IN
SERVICE ONLY
2
3 4 5 6
8
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
ANTENNA /
CABEL IN
/DVI IN
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
H/P
AUDIO
L(MONO)
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
COMPONENT IN
AV IN
SERVICE ONLY
10
11
9
7
Only 22LD3**
BACK PANEL INFORMATION
background
A-11
PREPARATION
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Power Cord Socket
This TV operates on an AC power. The volt-
age is indicated on the Specifications page.
(► p.161 to 173) Never attempt to operate
the TV on DC power.
HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to
HDMI cable.
RGB IN Input
Connect the output from a PC.
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of
equipment.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
Audio/Video Input
Connect audio/video output from an external
device to these jacks.
RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
Component Input
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
Antenna / Cable Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
SERVICE ONLY PORT
Headphone Socket
Plug the headphone into the headphone
socket.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
AC IN
CABLE MANAGEMENT
1
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
ANTENNA /
CABLE IN
/DVI IN
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
H/P
AUDIO
VIDEO
COMPONENT IN
AV IN 1
AV IN2
IN 2
1
L/MONO
SERVICE ONLY
2
3 4
8
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
ANTENNA /
CABLE IN
/DVI IN
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
H/P
AUDIO
VIDEO
COMPONENT IN
AV IN 1
AV IN2
IN 2
1
L/MONO
SERVICE ONLY
10
2
11
5
9
6
Only 26/32LD3**
7
6
background
A-12
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
AV IN 2
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
HDMI IN 2 USB IN
H/P
ANTENNA IN
HDMI / DVI IN
1
(RGB)
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Power Cord Socket
This TV operates on an AC power. The volt-
age is indicated on the Specifications page.
(► p.161 to 173) Never attempt to operate
the TV on DC power.
HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to
HDMI cable.
RGB IN Input
Connect the output from a PC.
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of
equipment.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
Audio/Video Input
Connect audio/video output from an external
device to these jacks.
RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
Component Input
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
Antenna / Cable Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
USB Input
Connect USB storage device to this jack.
Headphone Socket
Plug the headphone into the headphone
socket.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
ANTENNA /
CABLE IN
/DVI IN
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
H/P
AUDIO
VIDEO
COMPONENT IN
AV IN 1
AV IN2
IN 2
1
L/MONO
2
3 4
8
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
ANTENNA /
CABLE IN
/DVI IN
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
H/P
AUDIO
VIDEO
COMPONENT IN
AV IN 1
AV IN2
IN 2
1
L/MONO
10
2
11
5
9
6
7
6
Only 32/37/42/47LD4**
background
A-13
PREPARATION
Only 32/42/46/52/60LD55*
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Power Cord Socket
This TV operates on an AC power. The volt-
age is indicated on the Specifications page.
(► p.161 to 173) Never attempt to operate
the TV on DC power.
HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to
HDMI cable.
WIRELESS Control
Connect the Wireless Dongle to the TV to
control the external input devices connected
to Media Box wirelessly.
RGB IN Input
Connect the output from a PC.
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of
equipment.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
Audio/Video Input
Connect audio/video output from an external
device to these jacks.
Component Input
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
Antenna / Cable Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
USB Input
Connect USB storage device to this jack.
Headphone Socket
Plug the headphone into the headphone
socket.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
CABLE MANAGEMENT
AC IN
1
AV IN2
IN 3
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
ANTENNA /
CABLE IN
COMPONENT IN
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
R
H/P
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
ANTENNA IN
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
AV IN2
IN 3
H/P
1
2
2
1
2
3 4 5 6
9
AV IN2
IN 3
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
ANTENNA /
CABLE IN
COMPONENT IN
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
R
H/P
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
ANTENNA IN
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
AV IN2
IN 3
H/P
1
2
2
1
11
2
12
8
7
10
8
background
A-14
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
CABLE MANAGEMENT
AC IN
1
2
HDMI/DVI IN
(RGB)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
LAN
AV IN 2
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
HDMI IN 3 USB IN 1
H/P
USB IN 2
ANTENNA IN
Only 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**
1
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
RGB/DVI
WIRELESS
CONTROL
OPTICAL DIGITAL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
LAN
/DVI IN
1
2
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
R
L(MONO)
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN 1
h}GpuY
puGZ
H/P
USB IN 1
USB IN 2
ANTENNA /
CABLE IN
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
RGB/DVI
WIRELESS
CONTROL
OPTICAL DIGITAL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
LAN
/DVI IN
1
2
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
R
L(MONO)
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN 1
h}GpuY
puGZ
H/P
USB IN 1
USB IN 2
ANTENNA /
CABLE IN
12
12
3
8
2
3 54
6
10
8
7
9
11
13
Power Cord Socket
This TV operates on an AC power. The volt-
age is indicated on the Specifications page.
(► p.161 to 173) Never attempt to operate
the TV on DC power.
LAN
Network connection for Weather info, Photo
Album, Movie Online, etc.
Also used for video, photo and music files on
a local network.
HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to
HDMI cable.
RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
RGB IN Input
Connect the output from a PC.
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of
equipment.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
Audio/Video Input
Connect audio/video output from an external
device to these jacks.
WIRELESS Control
Connect the Wireless Dongle to the TV to
control the external input devices connected
to Media Box wirelessly.
Component Input
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
Antenna / Cable Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
USB Input
Connect USB storage device to this jack.
Headphone Socket
Plug the headphone into the headphone
socket.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
CABLE MANAGEMENT
AC IN
1
or
background
A-15
PREPARATION
Only 22LE53**
DC ADAPTER PORT
Connect to the power cord socket.
HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to
HDMI cable.
RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of
equipment.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
Audio/Video Input
Connect audio/video output from an external
device to these jacks.
RGB IN Input
Connect the output from a PC.
Component Input
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
Antenna / Cable Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
USB Input
Connect USB storage device to this jack.
Headphone Socket
Plug the headphone into the headphone
socket.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
ANTENNA /
CABLE IN
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
H/P
AUDIO
VIDEO
COMPONENT IN
AV IN
IN 3
L(MONO)
/DVI IN
1
2
(DVI)
H/P
DC-IN
1
3
8
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
ANTENNA /
CABLE IN
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
H/P
AUDIO
VIDEO
COMPONENT IN
AV IN
IN 3
L(MONO)
/DVI IN
1
2
(DVI)
H/P
DC-IN
10
2
11
9
2
4
5
6
7
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
ANTENNA /
CABLE IN
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
H/P
AUDIO
VIDEO
COMPONENT IN
AV IN
IN 3
L(MONO)
/DVI IN
1
2
(DVI)
H/P
DC-IN
Only 26LE53**,
26LE3***
Only 22/26LE53**, 22/26LE6***, 26LE3***
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
H/P
IN 3
10
2
11
Only 22/26LE6***
background
A-16
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Only 32/37/42/47/55LE53**, 32/42/47/55LE4***,
32LE3***
CAUTION
► Use a product with the follow-
ing thickness for optimal con-
nection to HDMI cable(only
HDMI IN 4) / USB device.
*A 10 mm
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Power Cord Socket
This TV operates on an AC power. The volt-
age is indicated on the Specifications page.
(► p.161 to 173) Never attempt to operate
the TV on DC power.
HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to
HDMI cable.
RGB IN Input
Connect the output from a PC.
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of
equipment.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
Audio/Video Input
Connect audio/video output from an external
device to these jacks.
WIRELESS Control
(Except 32/42/47/55LE46**)
Connect the Wireless Dongle to the TV to
control the external input devices connected
to Media Box wirelessly.
RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
Component Input
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
Antenna / Cable Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
USB Input
Connect USB storage device to this jack.
Headphone Socket
Plug the headphone into the headphone
socket.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
(RGB/DVI)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
/DVI IN
1
2
3
AUDIO IN
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
COMPONENT IN1
R
L(MONO)
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN 1
ANTENNA /
CABLE IN
(DVI)
H/P
USB IN
AV IN2
VIDEO / AUDIO
COMPONENT IN2
/ AUDIO
IN 4
Y P
B
P
R
1(DVI)
2
3
HDMI/DVI IN
(RGB)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN 2
LAN
USB IN 2
H/P
USB IN 1
HDMI
IN 4
ANTENNA
IN
AV IN3
VIDEO / AUDIO
COMPONENT IN2
AUDIO / Y P
B
P
R
1
2 43
8
6
5
7 9
10
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
(RGB/DVI)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
/DVI IN
1
2
3
AUDIO IN
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
COMPONENT IN1
R
L(MONO)
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN 1
ANTENNA /
CABLE IN
(DVI)
H/P
USB IN
AV IN2
VIDEO / AUDIO
COMPONENT IN2
/ AUDIO
IN 4
Y P
B
P
R
6
9
12
2
11
Except 32/42/47/55LE46**
background
A-17
PREPARATION
Only 32/37/42/47/55LE55**, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***,
42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***
1(DVI)
2
3
HDMI/DVI IN
(RGB)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN 2
LAN
USB IN 2
H/P
USB IN 1
HDMI
IN 4
ANTENNA
IN
AV IN3
VIDEO / AUDIO
COMPONENT IN2
AUDIO / Y P
B PR
1
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
(RGB/DVI)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
OPTICAL DIGITAL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
LAN
/DVI IN
1
2
3
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
R
L(MONO)
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN 1
USB IN 2
H/P
USB IN 1
AV IN2
VIDEO / AUDIO
COMPONENT IN3
AUDIO / Y P
B PR
IN 4
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
12
11
8
3
10
CAUTION
► Use a product with the follow-
ing thickness for optimal con-
nection to HDMI cable(only
HDMI IN 4) / USB device.
*A 10 mm
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Power Cord Socket
This TV operates on an AC power. The volt-
age is indicated on the Specifications page.
(► p.161 to 173) Never attempt to operate
the TV on DC power.
LAN
Network connection for Weather info, Photo
Album, Movie Online, etc.
Also used for video, photo and music files on
a local network.
HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to
HDMI cable.
RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
RGB IN Input
Connect the output from a PC.
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of
equipment.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
Audio/Video Input
Connect audio/video output from an external
device to these jacks.
WIRELESS Control
Connect the Wireless Dongle to the TV to
control the external input devices connected
to Media Box wirelessly.
Component Input
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
USB Input
Connect USB storage device to this jack.
Headphone Socket
Plug the headphone into the headphone
socket.
Antenna / Cable Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
(RGB/DVI)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
OPTICAL DIGITAL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
LAN
/DVI IN
1
2
3
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
R
L(MONO)
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN 1
USB IN 2
H/P
USB IN 1
AV IN2
VIDEO / AUDIO
COMPONENT IN3
AUDIO / Y P
B
P
R
IN 4
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
2
3 54
6
10
8
7
9
13
background
A-18
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
M4X20
M4X20
Carefully place the TV screen side down
on a cushioned surface to protect the
screen from damage.
Assemble the TV as shown.
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in
the back of the TV.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
When assembling the desk type stand, check whether the bolt is fully tightened. (If not tightened fully,
the product can tilt forward after the product installation.) If you tighten the bolt with excessive force,
the bolt can deviate from abrasion of the tightening part of the bolt.
1
3
4
M4X20
M4X20
Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with
the Stand Base of the TV.
2
Stand Body
Stand Base
M4X20
M4X20
M4X20
M4X20
M4X20
M4X20
Carefully place the TV screen side down
on a cushioned surface to protect the
screen from damage.
1
Only 22LD3**
Only 26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LD4**,
32/42/46/52/60LD5**, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**
Assemble the TV as shown.
2
STAND INSTALLATION
background
A-19
PREPARATION
Carefully place the TV screen side down
on a cushioned surface to protect the
screen from damage.
1
Assemble the TV as shown.
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in
the back of the TV.
3
4
Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with
the Stand Base of the TV.
2
Stand Base
M4 X 14
Only 22LE53**
Stand Body
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Only 26/32/37/42/47/55LE53**, 26/32LE3***
Carefully place the TV screen side down
on a cushioned surface to protect the
screen from damage.
1
Assemble the TV as shown.
3
Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with
the Stand Base of the TV.
2
Assemble the parts of the Stand Rear
Cover with the TV.
4
Stand Rear
Cover
M4 X 20
(Only 26LE53**, 26LE3***)
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in
the back of the TV.
5
M4 X 14
(Only 26LE53
**,
26LE3***
)
M4 X 16 (Only
32/37/42/47/55LE53
**,
32LE3***
)
M4 X 22(Only 32LE53**,
32LE3***)
M4 X 24 (Only 37/42LE53**)
M4 X 26 (Only 47/55LE53**)
Stand
Body
Stand
Base
background
A-20
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Carefully place the TV screen side down
on a cushioned surface to protect the
screen from damage.
1
Assemble the TV as shown.
3
Assemble the parts of the Stand Rear
Cover with the TV.
4
Stand Rear
Cover
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in
the back of the TV.
5
Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with
the Stand Base of the TV.
At this time, tighten the screws that hold the
Stand Body on.
2
Stand
Body
Stand
Base
M4 X 16
(Only 32/37/42/47LE55
**
,
32/37/42/47LE7
***
, 42/47LX6***)
M4 X 24
(Only 55LE55**,
55LE7***, 55LX6***)
M4 X 16
(Only
32/37/42/47/55LE55
**
,
32/37/42/47/55LE7
***
,
42/47/55LX6***)
M4 X 20
(Only 42/47/55LE8
***
)
M4 X 20
(Only 42/47/55LE8
***
)
Only 32/37/42/47/55LE55**, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
background
A-21
PREPARATION
Carefully place the TV screen side down
on a cushioned surface to protect the
screen from damage.
1
Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with
the Stand Base of the TV.
At this time, tighten the screws that hold the
Stand Body on.
2
Stand Body
Stand Base
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in
the back of the TV.
3
Assemble the parts of the Stand Rear
Cover with the TV.
4
M4 X 12
M4 X 22
M4X20
M4X20
M4X20
M4X20
Only 47/55LX9***
Stand Rear
Cover
Only 22/26LE6***
Carefully place the TV screen side down
on a cushioned surface to protect the
screen from damage.
1
Assemble the TV as shown.
2
Fix the 2 screws securely using the holes
in the back of the TV.
3
M4 X 16
background
A-22
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Carefully place the TV screen side down
on a cushioned surface to protect the
screen from damage.
1
Assemble the TV as shown.
3
Assemble the parts of the Stand Rear
Cover with the TV.
4
Stand Rear
Cover
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in
the back of the TV.
5
Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with
the Stand Base of the TV.
At this time, tighten the screws that hold the
Stand Body on.
2
Only 32/42/47/55LE4***
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Stand
Body
Stand
Base
M4 X 22(Only 32LE45
**,
32/42/47/55LE46**
)
M4 X 24 (Only 42LE45
**
)
M4 X 16
background
A-23
PREPARATION
Carefully place the TV screen side down
on a cushioned surface to protect the
screen from damage.
1
Only 32/42/47/55LE46**
Remove the screws from the TV.
2
Detach the Stand Rear Cover and Stand
from TV.
3
WOOFER INSTALLATION :WHEN USING THE WALL
MOUNT
Detach the Woofer from the stand.
5
4
Assemble the Woofer with the TV.
Turn the PEM nut for the woofer using a
flathead driver and install the 2 screws as
shown.
When installing the woofer in the TV,
make sure that the power cord is not
twisted, bent or pinched.
background
A-24
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Only 22LD3**, 22/26LE6***
After connecting the cables as necessary, install
Cable Tie as shown and bundle the cables.
K
AC-IN
K
AC-IN
Cable Tie
BACK COVER FOR WIRE
ARRANGEMENT
Only 26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LD4**,
32/37/42/47/55LD6**, 32/42/46/52/60LD5**
AC IN
AC IN
AC IN
Connect the cables as necessary.
To connect additional equipment, see the
External equipment setup section.
1
Open the Cable Management Clip as
shown and manage the cables.
2
Fit the Cable management clip as shown.
3
AC IN
AC IN
AC IN
AC IN
AC IN
AC IN
Cable Management Clip
AC IN
AC IN
AC IN
AC IN
AC IN
AC IN
NOTE
►Do not use the CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP
to lift the TV.
- If the TV is dropped, you may be injured or the
TV may be damaged.
background
A-25
PREPARATION
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
After connecting the cables as necessary,
install Cable Holder as shown and bundle
the cables.
Cable Holder
Only 32/37/42/47/55LE5***,
32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***,
42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***, 32/42/47/55LE4***,
32LE3***
Only 22/26LE5***, 26LE3***
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
The TV must be attached to desk so it cannot be
pulled in a forward/backward direction, potential-
ly causing injury or damaging the product. Use
only an attached screw.
AC IN
CABLE MANAGEMENT
AC IN
CABLE MANAGEMENT
Desk
Stand
WARNING
►To prevent TV from falling over, the TV
should be securely attached to the floor/wall
per installation instructions. Tipping, shaking,
or rocking the machine may cause injury.
AC IN
CABLE MANAGEMENT
1-Screw ( provided as parts of the product)
(Only 26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LD4**,
32/42LD5
**, 32/37/42LD6**, 32LE45**,
32/42/47/55LE46**, 32LE5***, 32LE7***,
32LE3***
)
ATTACHING THE TV TO A
DESK
1
Secure the power cord with the Cable
Holder on the TV back cover.
It will help prevent the power cable from
being removed by accident.
2
1(DVI)
2
3
HDMI/DVI IN
(RGB)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN 2
LAN
USB IN 2
H/P
USB IN 1
HDMI
IN 4
ANTENNA
IN
AV IN3
VIDEO / AUDIO
COMPONENT IN2
AUDIO / Y P
B PR
Cable Holder
After connecting the cables as necessary,
install Cable Holder as shown and bundle the
cables.
Cable Holder
background
A-26
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
When installing the wall-mounted unit, use the
protection cover.
Insert the Protection cover into the TV until
clicking sound.
Carefully place the TV screen side down
on a cushioned surface to protect the
screen from damage.
1
Only 22LD3**
Loose the bolts from TV.
2
Detach the Stand from TV.
3
After removing the protection paper from
the protection cover, adhere it to the TV as
shown.
4
Protection Cover
Only 26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LD4**,
32/42/46/52/60LD5**, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**
Protection cover
NOT USING THE DESK-
TYPE STAND
12
0
3
0
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Adjust the position of the panel in various ways
for maximum comfort.
• Tilt range
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
After installing the TV, you can adjust the TV set
manually to the left or right direction by 20
degrees to suit your viewing position.
SWIVEL STAND
POSITIONING YOUR
DISPLAY
(Except for 22LD3**, 22/26LE6***)
(Only 22LD3**)
background
A-27
PREPARATION
DC IN
■ This feature is not available for all models.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
CABLE MANAGEMENT
AC IN
The TV is equipped with a Kensington Security
System connector on the back panel. Connect
the Kensington Security System cable as shown
below.
For the detailed installation and use of the
Kensington Security System, refer to the user’s
guide provided with the Kensington Security
System.
For further information, contact http://www.kens-
ington.com, the internet homepage of the
Kensington
company. Kensington sells security systems for
expensive electronic equipment such as note-
book PCs and LCD projectors.
NOTE
► The
Kensington Security System is an
optional accessory.
►If the TV feels cold to the touch, there may
be a small “flicker” when it is turned on.
► Some minute
dot defects may be visible on
the screen, appearing as tiny red, green, or
blue spots. However, they have no adverse
effect on the monitor's performance.
► Avoid
touching the LCD screen or holding your
finger(s) against it for long periods of time.
Doing so may produce some temporary dis-
tortion effects on the screen.
Place the ring spacers on the set before
installing the wall mounting bracket so that
the inclination of the backside of the set can
be adjusted perpendicularly.
< Only 26LE5***, 26LE3*** >
4-Ring spacers
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
1
2
3
Connect the antenna cable to the antenna
input port on the TV.
Connect the AC/DC adapter plug to the
power input jack on the TV.
Connect the power cord to the AC/DC
adapter first, then plug the power cord into
the wall power outlet.
CAUTION
► Please be sure to connect the TV to the DC
power adapter before connecting the TV's
power plug to a wall power outlet.
AC/DC Adaptor
(Only 22/26LE5***, 22/26LE6***, 26LE3***)
CONNECTION OF TV
KENSINGTON SECURITY
SYSTEM
background
A-28
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
■ The TV can be installed in various ways such as
on a wall, or on a desktop etc.
■ The TV is designed to be mounted horizontally.
Power
Supply
Circuit
breaker
EARTHING
Ensure that you connect the earth wire to prevent
possible electric shock. If grounding methods are
not possible, have a qualified electrician install a
separate circuit breaker.
Do not try to earth the TV by connecting it to tele-
phone wires, lightening rods or gas pipes.
10 cm
For adequate ventilation allow a clearance of 10
cm all around the TV.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
2
■ You should purchase necessary components
to fix the TV safety and secure to the wall on
the market.
■ Position the TV close to the wall to avoid the
possibility of it falling when pushed.
■ The instructions shown below are a safer way
to set up the TV, by fixing it to the wall, avoid-
ing the possibility of it falling forwards if pulled.
This will prevent the TV from falling forward
and causing injury. This will also prevent the
TV from damage. Ensure that children do not
climb or hang from the TV.
3
Use the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts to fix the
product to the wall as shown in the picture.
(If your TV has bolts in the eyebolts, loosen then
bolts.)
* Insert the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts and
tighten them securely in the upper holes.
Secure the wall brackets with the bolts on the
wall. Match the height of the bracket that is
mounted on the wall.
Use a sturdy rope to tie the product for alignment.
It is safer to tie the rope so it becomes horizontal
between the wall and the product.
2
1
1
1
2
3
NOTE
► When moving the TV undo the cords first.
► Use a platform or cabinet strong and large
enough to support the size and weight of the TV.
► To use the TV safely make sure that the height of
the bracket on the wall and on the TV is the
same.
CAREFUL INSTALLATION
ADVICE
DESKTOP PEDESTAL
INSTALLATION
background
A-29
PREPARATION
■ We recommend the use of a LG Brand wall
mounting bracket when mounting the TV to a wall.
■ We recommend that you purchase a wall mount-
ing bracket which supports VESA standard.
■ LG recommends that wall mounting be per-
formed by a qualified professional installer.
NOTE
►Should Install wall mount on a solid wall per-
pendicular to the floor.
►Should use a special wall mount, if you want
to install it to ceiling or slanted wall.
►The surface that wall mount is to be mount-
ed on should be of sufficient strength to sup-
port the weight of TV set; e.g. concrete, nat-
ural rock, brick and hollow block.
►Installing screw type and length depends on
the wall mount used. Further information,
refer to the instructions included with the
mount.
►LG is not liable for any accidents or damage
to property or TV due to incorrect installa-
tion:
- Where a non-compliant VESA wall mount
is used.
- Incorrect fastening of screws to surface
which may cause TV to fall and cause per-
sonal injury.
- Not following the recommended Installation
method.
AA
BB
WALL MOUNT: HORIZONTAL
INSTALLATION
Model
VESA
(A
*
B)
Standard
Screw
Quantity
22LD3**,
22/26LE5***
22/26LE6***,
26LE3***
100
*
100 M4 4
26/32LD3
**,
32LD4**,
32LD5
**,
32LD6
**,
32LE5***,
32LE7***,
32LE4***,
32LE3***
200
*
100 M4 4
37/42/47LD4
**,
42/46LD5
**,
37/42/47LD6
**,
37/42/47LE5
***,
37/42/47LE7
***,
42/47LE8
***,
42/47LX6***,
47LX9***,
42/47LE4***
200 * 200 M6 4
52/60LD5
**,
55LD6
**,
55LE5
***,
55LE7
***,
55LE8
***,
55LX6***,
55LX9***,
55LE4***
400 * 400 M6 4
The clearance from the wall is 3.6 cm for this
product.
< Only 32/42/47/55LE46
**
>
Woofer
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
3.6 cm
1 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
background
A-30
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
P
A
G
E
P
1 2 3
4 5
0
6
7 8 9
LIST
Q.VIEW
AV MODE
INPUT
ENERGY
SAVING
MARK
FAV
RATIO
MUTE
SUBTITLE
AD
TV/
RAD
BACK
EXIT
OK
MENU
Q.MENU
GUIDE
INFO i
1
(
POWER)
ENERGY
SAVING
AV MODE
INPUT
TV/RAD
Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby.
Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV.(► p.119)
It helps you select and set images and sounds
when connecting AV devices.(► p.55)
External input mode rotate in regular sequence.
(
►
p.49)
Selects Radio, TV and DTV channel.
0~9 number
button
LIST
Q.VIEW
Selects a programme.
Selects numbered items in a menu.
Displays the programme table.
(
►
p.47)
Returns to the previously viewed programme.
MENU
GUIDE
Q. MENU
THUMBSTICK
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
OK
BACK
INFO i
EXIT
Selects a menu.
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
(
►
p.28)
Shows programme guide.
(
►
p.109)
Select the desired quick menu source.
(
►
p.27)
Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and
adjust the system settings to your preference.
Accepts your selection or displays the current
mode.
Allows the user to move return one step in an inter-
active application or other user interaction function.
Shows the present screen information.
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
Coloured
buttons
These buttons are used for teletext (on TELETEXT
models only), Programme edit.
TELETEXT
BUTTONS
SUBTITLE
These buttons are used for teletext.
For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.(►
p.155)
Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode.
1
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.
In Analogue TV and some countries, some remote control keys may not work.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LD4**, 32/42/46/52/60LD55*, 22/26/32/37/42/47/55LE53**,
22/26LE6***, 32/42/47/55LE46**(Except for India), 32/42LE45**, 26/32LE3***
P
A
G
E
P
1 2 3
4 5
0
6
7 8 9
LIST
Q.VIEW
AV MODE
INPUT
ENERGY
SAVING
MARK
FAV
RATIO
MUTE
SUBTITLE
AD
TV/
RAD
BACK
EXIT
OK
MENU
Q.MENU
GUIDE
INFO i
background
A-31
PREPARATION
P
A
G
E
P
1 2 3
4 5
0
6
7 8 9
LIST
Q.VIEW
AV MODE
INPUT
ENERGY
SAVING
MARK
FAV
RATIO
MUTE
SUBTITLE
AD
TV/
RAD
BACK
EXIT
OK
MENU
Q.MENU
GUIDE
INFO i
VOLUME UP
/DOWN
MARK
FAV
RATIO
MUTE
Programme
UP/DOWN
PAGE UP/
DOWN
Adjusts the volume.
Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard
settings.
Mark and un-Mark programmes in the USB menu.
Displays the selected favourite programme.
Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture.
(► p.116)
Switches the sound on or off.
Selects a programme.
Move from one full set of screen information to the
next one.
SIMPLINK /
MY MEDIA
Menu
control buttons
Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu.
See a list of AV devices connected to TV.
When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu
appears at the screen.
(
►
p.52)
Switches the Audio Description On or Off.
(Except for 22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LD4**,
22/26LE53**, 22/26LE6***, 26LE3***)
Installing Batteries
■ Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install
the batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -).
■ Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batter-
ies with new ones.
■ Close cover.
■ To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in
reverse.
AD
P
A
G
E
P
1 2 3
4 5
0
6
7 8 9
LIST
Q.VIEW
AV MODE
INPUT
ENERGY
SAVING
MARK
FAV
RATIO
MUTE
SUBTITLE
AD
TV/
RAD
BACK
EXIT
OK
MENU
Q.MENU
GUIDE
INFO i
background
A-32
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
P
A
G
E
P
1 2 3
4 5
0
6
7 8 9
LIST
Q.VIEW
AV MODE
INPUT
ENERGY
SAVING
MARK
FAV
MUTE
TV
BACK
EXIT
OK
MENU
Q.MENU
FAMILY
CRICKET
RATIO
TV
Selects TV channel.
FAMILY
CRICKET
Selects FAMILY mode in Picture Mode menu.
It helps you set images and sounds to CRICKET
mode when connecting AV devices.
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.
In Analogue TV and some countries, some remote control keys may not work.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
32/42/47LE46**(Only India)
REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
background
A-33
PREPARATION
P
A
G
E
P
1 2 3
4 5
0
6
7 8 9
LIST
Q.VIEW
AV MODE
INPUT
ENERGY
SAVING
MARK
FAV
RATIO
MUTE
TV/
RAD
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
CHAR/NUM
DELETE
SUBTITLE
INFO i
BACK
EXIT
OK
MENU
Q.MENU
GUIDE
REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**, 32/37/42/47/55LE55**, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***,
42/47/55LE8***
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.
In Analogue TV and some countries, some remote control keys may not work.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
(
POWER)
ENERGY
SAVING
AV MODE
INPUT
TV/RAD
Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby.
Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV.(► p.119)
It helps you select and set images and sounds
when connecting AV devices.(► p.55)
External input mode rotate in regular sequence.
(
►
p.49)
Selects Radio, TV and DTV channel.
0~9 number
button
LIST
Q.VIEW
Selects a programme.
Selects numbered items in a menu.
Displays the programme table.
(
►
p.47)
Returns to the previously viewed programme.
MENU
NETCAST
Q. MENU
THUMBSTICK
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
OK
BACK
GUIDE
EXIT
Selects a menu.
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
(
►
p.28)
Select the desired NetCast menu source.
(
►
p.57)
(Weather info, Photo Album, Movie Online and
etc.) NetCast menu source can differ by country.
Select the desired quick menu source.
(
►
p.27)
Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and
adjust the system settings to your preference.
Accepts your selection or displays the current
mode.
Allows the user to move return one step in an inter-
active application or other user interaction function.
Shows programme guide.
(
►
p.109)
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
Coloured
buttons
These buttons are used for teletext (on TELETEXT
models only), Programme edit.
TELETEXT
BUTTONS
SUBTITLE
These buttons are used for teletext.
For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.(►
p.155)
Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode.
1
1
background
A-34
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
VOLUME UP
/DOWN
MARK
FAV
CHAR/NUM
RATIO
MUTE
DELETE
Programme
UP/DOWN
PAGE UP/
DOWN
Adjusts the volume.
Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard
settings.
Mark and un-Mark programmes in the USB menu.
Displays the selected favourite programme.
Shifts the Character or Number for NetCast menu.
Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture.
(► p.116)
Switches the sound on or off.
Deletes the entered character when entering the
character on the screen keyboard.
Selects a programme.
Move from one full set of screen information to the
next one.
SIMPLINK /
MY MEDIA
Menu
control buttons
Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu.
P
A
G
E
P
1 2 3
4 5
0
6
7 8 9
LIST
Q.VIEW
AV MODE
INPUT
ENERGY
SAVING
MARK
FAV
RATIO
MUTE
TV/
RAD
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
CHAR/NUM
DELETE
SUBTITLE
INFO i
BACK
EXIT
OK
MENU
Q.MENU
GUIDE
Installing Batteries
■ Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install
the batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -).
■ Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batter-
ies with new ones.
■ Close cover.
■ To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in
reverse.
INFO i
See a list of AV devices connected to TV.
When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu
appears at the screen.
(
►
p.52)
Shows the present screen information.
background
A-35
PREPARATION
P
A
G
E
P
1 2 3
4 5
0
6
7 8 9
LIST
Q.VIEW
AV MODE
INPUT
ENERGY
SAVING
MARK
FAV
3D
MUTE
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
CHAR/NUM
DELETE
INFO i
BACK
EXIT
OK
MENU
Q.MENU
TV/
RAD
L/R SELECT
RATIO
LIGHT
GUIDE
REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.
In Analogue TV and some countries, some remote control keys may not work.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
(
POWER)
LIGHT
ENERGY
SAVING
AV MODE
INPUT
TV/RAD
Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby.
You can turn the light of the remote control button
on or off. (Only 47/55LX9***)
Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV.(►
p.119)
It helps you select and set images and sounds
when connecting AV devices.(► p.55)
External input mode rotate in regular sequence.
(
►
p.49)
Selects Radio, TV and DTV channel.
0~9 number
button
LIST
Q.VIEW
Selects a programme.
Selects numbered items in a menu.
Displays the programme table.
(
►
p.47)
Returns to the previously viewed programme.
MENU
NETCAST
Q. MENU
THUMBSTICK
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
OK
BACK
GUIDE
EXIT
Selects a menu.
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
(
►
p.28)
Select the desired NetCast menu source.
(
►
p.57)
(Weather info, Photo Album, Movie Online and
etc.) NetCast menu source can differ by country.
Select the desired quick menu source.
(
►
p.27)
Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and
adjust the system settings to your preference.
Accepts your selection or displays the current
mode.
Allows the user to move return one step in an inter-
active application or other user interaction function.
Shows programme guide.
(
►
p.109)
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
Coloured
buttons
L/R SELECT
These buttons are used for teletext (on TELETEXT
models only), Programme edit.
Use this to view the 3D video. (► p.72)
background
A-36
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
P
A
G
E
P
1 2 3
4 5
0
6
7 8 9
LIST
Q.VIEW
AV MODE
INPUT
ENERGY
SAVING
MARK
FAV
3D
MUTE
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
CHAR/NUM
DELETE
INFO i
BACK
EXIT
OK
MENU
Q.MENU
TV/
RAD
L/R SELECT
RATIO
LIGHT
GUIDE
VOLUME UP
/DOWN
MARK
FAV
CHAR/NUM
3D
DELETE
MUTE
Programme
UP/DOWN
PAGE UP/
DOWN
Adjusts the volume.
Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard
settings.
Check and un-check programmes in the USB
menu.
Displays the selected favourite programme.
Shifts the Character or Number for NetCast menu.
Use this to view the 3D video. (► p.72)
Deletes the entered character when entering the
character on the screen keyboard.
Switches the sound on or off.
Selects a programme.
Move from one full set of screen information to the
next one.
SIMPLINK /
MY MEDIA
Menu
control buttons
Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu.
Installing Batteries
■ Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install
the batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -).
■ Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batter-
ies with new ones.
■ Close cover.
■ To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in
reverse.
1
TELETEXT
BUTTONS
SUBTITLE
These buttons are used for teletext.
For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.(►
p.155)
Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode.
1
INFO i
RATIO
See a list of AV devices connected to TV.
When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu
appears at the screen.
(
►
p.52)
Shows the present screen information.
Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture.
(► p.116)
background
1
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
CABLE MANAGEMENT
AC IN
AV IN2
IN 3
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
ANTENNA
IN
COMPONENT IN
1
/DVI IN
2
WIRELESS
CONTROL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
R
H/P
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
ANTENNA IN
RGB IN (PC)
2
1
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L(MONO)
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
AV IN2
IN 3
H/P
ANTENNA CONNECTION
■ For optimum picture quality, adjust antenna direction.
■ An antenna cable and converter are not supplied.
■ To prevent damage do not connect to the mains outlet until all connections are made between the
devices.
Multi-family Dwellings/Apartments
(Connect to wall antenna socket)
Single-family Dwellings /Houses
(Connect to wall jack for outdoor antenna)
Outdoor
Antenna
(VHF, UHF)
Wall
Antenna
Socket
RF Coaxial Wire (75 Ω)
Antenna
UHF
Signal
Amplifier
VHF
■ In poor signal areas, to achieve better picture quality it may be necessary to install a signal amplifier
to the antenna as shown above.
■ If signal needs to be split for two TVs,use an antenna signal splitter for connection.
AV IN2
IN 3
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
ANTENNA
IN
COMPONENT IN
1
/DVI IN
2
WIRELESS
CONTROL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
R
H/P
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
ANTENNA IN
RGB IN (PC)
2
1
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L(MONO)
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
AV IN2
IN 3
H/P
background
2
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
CONNECTING WITH A COMPONENT CABLE
■ To avoid damaging any equipment, never plug in any power cord until you have finished connecting
all equipment.
■ This section on EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP mainly uses diagrams for the
32/42/46/52/60LD55* models.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC
)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTRO
L
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
COMPONENT IN
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
/DVI IN
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
/DVI IN
IN 3
H/P
AV IN2
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AV IN2
IN 3
H/P
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
/DVI IN
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
R
L/MONO
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
AV IN1
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
1 2
■ This TV can receive Digital RF/Cable signals without an external digital set-top box. However, if you
do receive Digital signals from a digital set-top box or other digital external device, refer to the dia-
gram as shown below.
Component Input ports
To achieve better picture quality, connect a DVD player to the component input ports as shown below.
Component ports on the TV Y PB PR
Video output ports
on DVD player
Y PB PR
Y B-Y R-Y
Y Cb Cr
Y Pb Pr
1
Connect the video outputs
(
Y, PB, PR
)
of the external equipment (digital set-top box, DVD, etc.) to
the COMPONENT IN VIDEO jacks on the TV.
2
Connect the audio output of the external equipment (digital set-top box, DVD, etc.) to the
COMPONENT IN AUDIO jacks on the TV.
3
Turn on the external equipment.
(
Refer to the external equipment's manual for operating instructions.)
4
Select the Component1 input source using the INPUT button on the remote control.
If connected to COMPONENT IN2 or COMPONENT IN3, select Component2 or Component3
input source.
USB IN 2
H/P
USB IN 1
AV IN2
VIDEO / AUDIO
COMPONENT IN3
AUDIO / Y P
B PR
IN 4
1
2
or
background
3
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
CONNECTING WITH A COMPONENT CABLE
► HDMI Audio Supported format : Dolby Digital, PCM
DTS Audio format is not supported.
Signal Component HDMI
480i/576i O X
480p/576p O O
720p/1080i O O
1080p
O
(50 Hz / 60 Hz only)
O
(24 Hz / 30 Hz / 50 Hz / 60 Hz)
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
COMPONENT IN
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
/DVI IN
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
/DVI IN
IN 3
H/P
AV IN2
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AV IN2
IN 3
H/P
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
/DVI IN
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
R
L/MONO
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
AV IN1
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
CONNECTING WITH AN HDMI CABLE
1
NOTE
► The TV can receive video and audio signals simultaneously when
using an HDMI cable.
► If the DVD does not support Auto HDMI, you must set the output reso-
lution appropriately.
► Check that your HDMI cable is High Speed HDMI Cable. If the HDMI
cables are not High Speed HDMI Cable, flickering or no screen dis-
play can result. Please use the High Speed HDMI Cable.
► The TV set can process audio format of PCM or Dolby Digital, when
connect the external equipment using an HDMI cable.
1
Connect the HDMI output of the external equipment (digital set-
top box, DVD, etc.) to HDMI/DVI IN 1, HDMI/DVI IN 2(Except
for 22LD3**), HDMI IN 3(Except for 22/26/32LD3**,
32/37/42/47LD4**, 22LE5***) or HDMI IN 4 (Only
32/37/42/47/55LE5***, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***,
42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***, 32/42/47/55LE4***, 32LE3***)
jack on the TV.
2
Turn on the external equipment.
(Refer to the external equipment's manual for operating
instructions.)
3
Select HDMI1, HDMI2(Except for 22LD3**), HDMI3(Except for
22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LD4**, 22LE5***) or HDMI4 (Only
32/37/42/47/55LE5***, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***,
42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***, 32/42/47/55LE4***, 32LE3***)
input source using the INPUT button on the remote control.
background
4
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
COMPONENT IN
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
/DVI IN
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
/DVI IN
IN 3
H/P
AV IN2
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AV IN2
IN 3
H/P
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
/DVI IN
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
R
L/MONO
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
AV IN1
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
CONNECTING WITH AN HDMI TO DVI CABLE
1 2
or
1
Connect the digital set-top box or the DVI out-
put of the PC to HDMI/DVI IN 1, HDMI/DVI IN
2 (Except for 22/26/32LD3**,
32/37/42/47LD4**), HDMI/DVI IN 3(Only
32/37/42/47/55LE5***, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***,
42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***,
32/42/47/55LE4***, 32LE3***) jack on the TV.
2
Connect the audio output of the digital set-top
box or the PC audio output to the AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI) jack on the TV.
3
Turn on the digital set-top box or the PC and
the TV.
(
Refer to the digital set-top box or the PC
manual for operating instructions.)
4
Select HDMI1, HDMI2(Except for
22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LD4**),
HDMI3(Only 32/37/42/47/55LE5***,
32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***,
42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***,
32/42/47/55LE4***, 32LE3***) input source
using the INPUT button on the remote control.
background
5
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
COMPONENT IN
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
/DVI IN
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
/DVI IN
IN 3
H/P
AV IN2
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AV IN2
IN 3
H/P
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
/DVI IN
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
R
L/MONO
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
AV IN1
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
CONNECTING WITH AN RCA CABLE
Camcorder
Video Game Set
or
NOTE
► If you have a mono VCR, connect the audio cable from
the VCR to the AUDIO L/MONO jack of the TV.
1
Connect the AUDIO/VIDEO jacks between TV
and VCR or external equipment.
2
Insert a video tape into the VCR and press
PLAY on the VCR.
(
Refer to the VCR owner’s
manual.
)
Or, Operate the corresponding external equip-
ment.
(Refer to external equipment operating guide.)
3
Select AV1 input source using the INPUT but-
ton on the remote control.
If connected to AV2 input, select AV2 input
source.
1
USB IN 2
H/P
USB IN 1
COMPONENT IN3
AUDIO / Y PB PR
IN 4
AV IN2
VIDEO / AUDIO
or
background
6
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
CONNECTING WITH AN RF CABLE
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
COMPONENT IN
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
/DVI IN
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
/DVI IN
IN 3
H/P
AV IN2
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AV IN2
IN 3
H/P
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
/DVI IN
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
R
L/MONO
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
AV IN1
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
■ To avoid picture noise (interference), allow adequate distance between the VCR and TV.
Wall Jack
Antenna
1
2
1
Connect the ANT OUT socket of the VCR to
the ANTENNA / CABLE IN socket on the TV.
2
Connect the antenna cable to the ANT IN
socket of the VCR.
3
Press the PLAY button on the VCR and match
the appropriate channel between the TV and
VCR for viewing.
h}GpuY
puGZ
H/P
HEADPHONE SETUP
You can listen the sound through the headphone.
NOTE
► AUDIO menu items are disabled when connecting a headphone.(Except for 32/37/42/47LD460C)
► When changing AV MODE with a headphone connected, the change is applied to video but not to audio.
(Except for 32/37/42/47LD460C)
► Optical Digital Audio Out is not available when connecting a headphone. (Except for 32/37/42/47LD460C)
► Headphone impedance: 16 Ω
► Max audio output of headphone: 10 mW to 15 mW
1
Plug the headphone into the headphone socket.
2
To adjust the headphone volume, press the
+ or - button. If you press the MUTE button,
the sound from the headphone is switched off.
background
7
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
COMPONENT IN
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
/DVI IN
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
/DVI IN
IN 3
H/P
AV IN2
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/
MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AV IN2
IN 3
H/P
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
/DVI IN
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
R
L/MONO
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
AV IN1
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
1
2
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT SETUP
Sending the TV’s audio signal to external audio equipment via the Digital Audio Output (Optical) port.
If you want to enjoy digital broadcasting through 5.1-channel speakers, connect the OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal on the back of TV to a Home Theater (or amp).
CAUTION
► Do not look into the optical output port. Looking at the laser
beam may damage your vision.
1
Connect one end of an optical cable to the TV
Digital Audio
(
Optical
)
Output port.
2
Connect the other end of the optical cable to
the digital audio
(
Optical
)
input on the audio
equipment.
3
Set the “TV Speaker option - Off ” in the
AUDIO menu.(
►
p.138). Refer to the external
audio equipment instruction manual for opera-
tion.
NOTE
► When connecting with external audio equipments, such as
amplifiers or speakers, please turn the TV speakers off.
background
8
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
CONNECTING WITH A D-SUB 15 PIN CABLE
This TV provides Plug and Play capability, meaning that the PC adjusts automatically to the TV's
settings.
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
COMPONENT IN
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
/DVI IN
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
/DVI IN
IN 3
H/P
AV IN2
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AV IN2
IN 3
H/P
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
/DVI IN
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
R
L/MONO
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
AV IN1
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
1 2
1
Connect the RGB output of the PC to the RGB
IN (PC) jack on the TV.
2
Connect the PC audio output to the AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI) jack on the TV.
3
Turn on the PC and the TV
4
Select RGB input source using the INPUT but-
ton on the remote control.
AV IN2
IN 3
H/P
1
1
Connect the USB device to the USB IN 1 or
USB IN 2 jack on the TV.
2
After connecting the USB IN 1 or USB IN 2
jack, you use the USB function. (
►
p. 76)
USB SETUP
(Except for 22/26/32LD3**)
or
background
9
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT WIRELESS CONNECTION
LG TVs with a Wireless Control port support the LG Wireless Media Box, which is sold
separately. When you connect the Wireless Ready Dongle (included with the Wireless Media Box) to the
TV, external devices can be connected to the LG Wireless Media Box and video and audio will be sent to
the TV wirelessly.
After the wireless is connected, press the INPUT button to view the wireless input screen.
Refer to the Wireless Media Box manual for operating instructions.
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
RGB IN (PC)
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
WIRELESS
CONTROL
/DVI IN
OUT
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
LG Wireless Media Box
(Only 32/42/46/52/60LD5**, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**, 32/37/42/47/55LE53**, 32/37/42/47/55LE55**, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***,
42/47/55LE8***, 32/42LE45**, 42/47/55LX6***, 47/55
LX9***, 32LE3***)
IN 4
AV1 AV2
COM1 COM2 RGB WIRELESS
A
R
L(MONO)
AUDIO
VIDEO
B
1
2
SERVICE ONLY
3
RGB IN (PC)
AUDIO IN
RS-232C IN
RGB/DVI
SERVICE ONLY
IR BLASTER
A
B
COMPONENT / AV IN 1
COMPONENT / AV IN 2
R
L(MONO)
AUDIO
VIDEO
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
DC IN 12V
HDMI1 HDMI2
HDMI3
HDMI4
L
R
L
R
/ DVI IN
NOTE
►WIRELESS CONTROL : Wireless Ready Dongle power supply and control usage.
►HDMI : Video/Audio signal is connected in Wireless Ready Dongle.
►When you connect to the Wireless Media Box (Separately sold product), you can watch the
external device connected to the Wireless Media Box through wireless connection.
►In wireless external output, Real Cinema and Digital Noise Reduction functions are not support-
ed.
1
Connect the WIRELESS CONTROL jack of the Wireless Ready Dongle to the WIRELESS
CONTROL jack on the TV.
2
Connect HDMI OUT jack of the Wireless Ready Dongle to the HDMI/DVI IN 1, HDMI/DVI IN 2,
HDMI IN 3 or HDMI IN 4 (Only 32/37/42/47/55LE5***, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***,
42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***, 32/42LE45**, 32LE3***) jack on the TV.
LG Wireless Ready Dongle
background
10
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
SUPPORTED DISPLAY RESOLUTION
RGB-PC, HDMI-PC mode
HDMI-DTV mode
Resolution
Horizontal
Frequency(kHz)
Vertical
Frequency(Hz)
720x400 31.468 70.08
640x480 31.469 59.94
800x600 37.879 60.31
1024x768 48.363 60.00
1280x768 47.78 59.87
1360x768 47.72 59.80
1280x1024 63.981 60.02
1920x1080
(RGB-PC)
66.587 59.93
1920x1080
(HDMI-PC)
67.5 60.00
Resolution
Horizontal
Frequency(kHz)
Vertical
Frequency(Hz)
720x480
31.469
31.5
59.94
60
720x576 31.25 50
1280x720
37.5
44.96
45
50
59.94
60
1920x1080
33.72
33.75
28.125
26.97
27
33.716
33.75
56.25
67.43
67.5
59.94
60
50
23.97
24
29.976
30.00
50
59.94
60
(Except for 22/26/32LD3**, 22/26/32LE53**, 26/32LE3***)
background
11
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
NOTE
► Avoid keeping a fixed image on the set’s screen
for prolonged periods of time. The fixed image
may become permanently imprinted on the
screen; use a screen saver when possible.
► There may be interference relating to resolution,
vertical pattern, contrast or brightness in PC
mode. Change the PC mode to another resolution
or change the refresh rate to another rate or
adjust the brightness and contrast on the menu
until the picture is clear. If the refresh rate of the
PC graphic card can not be changed, change the
PC graphic card or consult the manufacturer of
the PC graphic card.
► The synchronization input waveform for Horizontal
and Vertical frequencies are separate.
► We recom
m
end using 1920x1080, 60
Hz(Except for 22/26/32LD3**,
22/26/32LE53**, 26/32LE3***), 1360x768, 60
Hz(Only 22/26/32LD3**, 22/26/32LE53**,
26/32LE3***)
f
or the PC mode, this should pro-
vide the best picture quality.
► Connect the signal cable from the monitor output
port of the PC to the RGB (PC) port of the TV or
the signal cable from the HDMI output port of the
PC to the HDMI IN (or HDMI/DVI IN) port on the
TV.
► Connect the audio cable from the PC to the Audio
input on the TV. (Audio cables are not included with
the TV).
► If using a sound card, adjust PC sound as required.
► If the graphic card on the PC does not output ana-
logue and digital RGB simultaneously, connect only
one of either RGB or HDMI IN (or HDMI/DVI IN) to
display the PC output on the TV.
► If the graphic card on the PC does output analogue
and digital RGB simultaneously, set the TV to either
RGB or HDMI; (the other mode is set to Plug and
Play automatically by the TV.)
► DOS mode may not work depending on the video
card if you use an HDMI to DVI cable.
► If you use too long an RGB-PC cable, there may be
interference on the screen. We recommend using
under 5m of cable. This provides the best picture
quality.
background
12
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Returns Position, Size and Phase to the factory default settings.
This function works in the following mode : RGB[PC].
Screen Reset
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select PICTURE.
2
Select Screen.
3
Select Reset.
4
Select Yes.
5
Run Reset.
To Set
Auto Config.
SCREEN
Move
Prev.
Resolution
Position
Size
Phase
Reset
Yes No
OK
Move
PICTURE
• Sharpness 70
• Colour 60
• Tint 0
• Colour Temp. 0
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
• TruMotion : Off
• Screen
R G
W
C
• Screen
►
SCREEN SETUP FOR PC MODE
background
13
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Automatically adjusts the picture position and minimizes image instability. After adjustment, if the
image is still not correct, your TV is functioning properly but needs further adjustment.
Auto configure
This function is for automatic adjustment of the screen position, size, and phase The displayed image
will be unstable for a few seconds while the auto configuration is in progress.
Auto Configure (RGB [PC] mode only)
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
• If the position of the image is still not correct,
try Auto adjustment again.
• If picture needs to be adjusted again after
Auto adjustment in RGB (PC), you can adjust
the Position, Size or Phase.
1
Select PICTURE.
2
Select Screen.
3
Select Auto Config..
4
Select Yes.
5
Run Auto Config..
Auto Config.
Auto Config.
SCREEN
Move
Prev.
Resolution
Position
Size
Phase
Reset
Yes No
OK
Move
PICTURE
• Sharpness 70
• Colour 60
• Tint 0
• Colour Temp. 0
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
• TruMotion : Off
• Screen
R G
W
C
• Screen
►
background
14
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
To view a normal picture, match the resolution of RGB mode and selection of PC mode.
This function works in the following mode: RGB[PC]
Selecting Resolution
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select PICTURE.
2
Select Screen.
3
Select Resolution.
4
Select the desired resolution.
5
Auto Config.
SCREEN
Move
Prev.
Resolution
Position
Size
Phase
Reset
OK
Move
PICTURE
• Sharpness 70
• Colour 60
• Tint 0
• Colour Temp. 0
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
• TruMotion : Off
• Screen
R G
W
C
• Screen
1024 x 768
1280 x 768
1360 x 768
►
background
15
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
If the picture is not clear after auto adjustment and especially if characters are still trembling, adjust
the picture position manually.
This function works in the following mode : RGB[PC].
Adjustment for screen Position, Size, Phase
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select PICTURE.
2
Select Screen.
3
Select Position, Size or Phase.
4
Make appropriate adjustments.
5
OK
Move
PICTURE
• Sharpness 70
• Colour 60
• Tint 0
• Colour Temp. 0
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
• TruMotion : Off
• Screen
R G
W
C
• Screen
►
Auto Config.
SCREEN
Resolution
Position
Size
Phase
Reset
Move
Prev.
background
16
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
NETWORK SETUP
This TV can be connected to a local area network (LAN) via the LAN port. After making the physical
connection, the TV needs to be set up for network communication.
Wired Network Connection
(RGB/DVI)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
OPTICAL DIGITAL
LAN
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
1
2
3
R
L(MONO)
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN 1
Broadband Modem
Router
Broadband Modem
Broadband Service
Broadband Service
1
(Only 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**, 32/37/42/47/55LE55**, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***,
42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***)
1
Connect the LAN port of the Modem or Router to the LAN
port on the TV.
2
Select “Network Setting” in the NETWORK menu.
3
After connecting the LAN port, use the NetCast menu.
For more information about NETCAST setup and trouble-
shooting, visit http://lgknowledgebase.com. Search for
NetCast.
CAUTION
►Do not connect a modular phone cable to the LAN port.
►Since there are various connection methods, please follow the specifications of your
telecommunication carrier or internet service provider.
This feature is not available in all countries.
background
17
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Wired Network Setup
1
Select NETWORK.
2
Select Network Setting.
3
Select Wired.
4
If you already set Network Setting: Select Resetting. The new connection settings
resets the current network settings.
5
Select IP Auto Setting or IP Manual Setting.
When Selecting IP Manual Setting:
IP addresses will need to be input manually.
6
Select OK.
If wired and wireless networks are both available, wired is the preferred method.
After making a physical connection, a small number of home networks may require the TV network
settings to be adjusted.
For detail information, contact your internet provider or router manual.
If you already set
the Network Setting
Previous setting value exists. Do
you want to connect with the
previous setting?
OK
Resetting
ꔉ Next
Exit
NETWORK
OK
Move
• Network Setting : Wired
• Network Status : Internet is connected
• Legal Notice
• Network Setting : Wired
►
Network Type
Wired network is recommended
Wired
Wireless
IP Auto Setting
IP Manual Setting
Network Setting
Insert the IP address.
IP Mode
◄ IP Manual Setting ►
● IP Address 255 . 255 . 0 . 0
● Subnet Mask
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
● Gateway 255 . 255 . 0 . 0
● DNS Server 255 . 255 . 0 . 0
OK
Network Status
Network connecting
Setting Test Close
Exit
Network Setting
Select the IP setting mode.
IP Mode
◄ IP Auto Setting ►
● IP Address 255 . 255 . 0 . 0
● Subnet Mask
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
● Gateway 255 . 255 . 0 . 0
● DNS Server 255 . 255 . 0 . 0
OK
Exit
Previous
Previous
Appeared when
wired and wireless
are simultaneously
connected.
background
18
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
■ This feature requires an always-on broadband internet connection.
■ You do not need to connect to a PC to use this function.
■ If Network Setting is not working, check your network conditions. Check the LAN cable and
make sure your router has DHCP turned on if you wish to use the Auto Setting.
■ If the Network Setting is not completed, network may not operate normally.
■ IP Auto Setting: Select it if there is a DHCP server on the local area network (LAN) via wired
connection, the TV will automatically be allocated an IP address. If you’re using a broadband
router or broadband modem that has a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server
function. The IP address will automatically be determined.
■ IP Manual Setting: Select it if there is no DHCP server on the network and you want to set the IP
address manually.
background
19
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
NOTE
► For more information about NetCast setup and
troubleshooting, visit http://lgknowledgebase.
com. Search for NetCast.
► Use a standard LAN cable with this TV. Cat5
or better with a RJ45 connector.
► Many network connection problems during
set up can often be fixed by re-setting the
router or modem. After connecting the player
to the home network, quickly power off and/or
disconnect the power cable of the home net-
work router or cable modem. Then power on
and/or connect the power cable again.
► Depending on the internet service provider
(ISP), the number of devices that can
receive internet service may be limited by the
applicable terms of service. For details, con-
tact your ISP.
► LG is not responsible for any malfunction of
the TV and/or the internet connection feature
due to communication errors/malfunctions
associated with your broadband internet con-
nection, or other connected equipment.
► LG is not responsible for problems within your
internet connection.
► Some content available through the network
connection may not be compatible with the
TV. If you have questions about such content,
please contact the producer of the content.
► You may experience undesired results if the
network connection speed does not meet the
requirements of the content being accessed.
► Some internet connection operations may not
be possible due to certain restrictions set by
the Internet service provider (ISP) supplying
your broadband Internet connection.
► Any fees charged by an ISP including, without
limitation, connection charges are your
responsibility.
►
A 10 Base-T or 100 Base-TX LAN port is
required for connection to this TV. If your inter-
net service does not allow for such a connec-
tion, you will not be able to connect the TV.
► A DSL modem is required to use DSL service
and a cable modem is required to use cable
modem service. Depending on the access
method of and subscriber agreement with
your ISP, you may not be able to use the
internet connection feature contained in this
TV or you may be limited to the number of
devices you can connect at the same time. (If
your ISP limits sub-scription to one device,
this TV may not be allowed to connect when
a PC is already connected.)
► The use of a “Router” may not be allowed or
its usage may be limited depending on the
policies and restrictions of your ISP. For
details, contact your ISP directly.
► The wireless network operates at 2.4 GHz
radio frequencies that are also used by other
household devices such as cordless tele-
phone, Bluetooth® devices, microwave oven,
and can be affected by interference from
them.It can be interrupted by the device using
5 Ghz radio frequencies. It is same device
with LG wireless media box, cordless tele-
phone, other Wi-Fi device.
► It may decrease the service speed using
Wireless network by surrounding wireless
condition.
► Turn off all unused network equipment in your
local home network. Some devices may gen-
erate network traffic.
► In some instances, placing the access point
or wireless router higher up away from the
floor may improve the reception.
► The reception quality over wireless depends
on many factors such as type of the access
point, distance between the TV and access
point, and the location of the TV.
►When connecting internet through the wired/
wireless sharing machine, it may interrupt the
connection because of the use limitation and
confirmation of service company.
►To connect wireless AP, an AP that supports
the wireless connection is necessary, and the
wireless connection function of the AP needs
to be activated. Please enquire to the AP
supplier for the possibility of AP wireless con-
nections.
► Please verify the security settings of AP SSID for
wireless AP connection, and enquire to the AP
supplier for the AP SSID security settings.
► The TV can become slower or malfunction with
wrong settings of network equipments (wired/wire-
less router, hub, etc). Please install correctly by
referring to the manual of the equipment, and set
the network.
►When AP is set to include 802.11 n, and if
Encryption is designated as WEP(64/128bit)
or WPA(TKIP/AES), the connection may not
be possible. There may be different connec-
tion methods according to the AP manufactur-
ers.
background
20
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
AV IN2
IN 3
H/P
The LG Wireless LAN for Broadband/DLNA Adaptor, allows the TV to connect to a wireless lan
network.
The network configuration and connection method may vary depending on the equipment in use and
the network environment. Refer to the setup instructions supplied with your access point or wireless
router for detailed connection steps and network settings.
Wireless Network Connection
1
Connect the “LG Wireless LAN for Broadband/DLNA
Adaptor” to the USB IN 1 or USB IN 2 jack on the TV.
2
Select “Network Setting” in the NETWORK menu.
After connecting, you can use the NetCast menu.
NOTE
►For enjoying pictures, music, or video stored in the PC using the router, the use of wired port in
the router is recommended.
►When the wireless port of the router is used, there may be restrictions for some functions.
background
21
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Setting up the AP (Access Point) or the wireless router is required before connecting the TV to the network.
Wireless Network Setup
6
Scan the all available AP (Access
Point) or wireless routers within range
and display them as a list.
7
Select an AP (Access Point) or
wireless router on the list.
(If your AP is locked, insert the
security key of AP).
8
Input the security key of AP.
1
Select NETWORK.
2
Select Network Setting.
3
Select Wireless.
4
If you already set Network Setting:
Select Resetting.
The new connection settings resets
the current network settings.
5
Select Setting from the AP list.
Select the wireless network setting type.
Select the wireless network setting type
Setting from the AP list
Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
Setting Ad-hoc network
ꔉ Next
9
Repeat step 4-5 on P.17.
Inserting the security key
Insert the security key of AP.
◄ ►
If your AP is locked
If you already set the
Network Setting
Previous setting value exists. Do
you want to connect with the
previous setting?
OK
Resetting
ꔉ Next
Exit
Exit
Previous
Selecting AP
ꔉ Next
Select AP you want to connect.
Page 1/1
Input the new SSID
iptime
ASW
Network1
Connecting with PIN mode
Access Point
Search
Network Setting
Select the IP setting mode.
IP Mode
◄ IP Auto Setting ►
● IP Address 255 . 255 . 0 . 0
● Subnet Mask
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
● Gateway 255 . 255 . 0 . 0
● DNS Server 255 . 255 . 0 . 0
OK
Exit
Previous
NETWORK
OK
Move
• Network Setting : Wired
• Network Status : Internet is connected
• Legal Notice
• Network Setting : Wired
►
Network Type
Wired network is recommended
Wired
Wireless
Previous Exit
OK
Cancel
Exit
Prev.
Appeared when
wired and wireless
are simultaneously
connected.
Insert 8~63 ASCII characters
background
22
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
If you want to connect the AP (Access Point) or router with PIN, use this feature.
When a security code is already set
PIN (Personal Identification Number)
■ PIN number is the unique 8 digit number
of the dongle.
Connecting with PIN mode
Insert PIN number at the AP webpage and
press ‘Connect’ button.
PIN NUMBER : 12345670
Connect
For more information, check the AP manual.
ꔉ Next
2
RED
Connect the access point with PIN
mode.
4
Select Connect.
1
Repeat step 1-6 on P.21.
5
Repeat step 4-5 on P.17.
3
You can see the Network ID and Security Key
on your TV screen.
Enter the PIN number to your device.
Selecting AP
ꔉ Next
Select AP you want to connect.
Page 1/1
Input the new SSID
iptime
ASW
Network1
Connecting with PIN mode
Access Point
Search
Exit Previous
Exit
Previous
background
23
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
If your access point or wireless router that supports PIN or WPS(Wi-Fi Protected Setup), it’s available
to use your access point or wireless router within 120 counts. You do not need to know the access
point name (SSID: Service Set Identifier) and security code of your access point or wireless router.
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
Press PBC mode button of AP and press ‘Connect’ button.
Connect
Caution: Check if PBC mode button is available for your AP.
ꔉ Next
1
Repeat step 1-4 on P.21.
2
Select Simple setting (WPS-button mode).
3
Select Connect.
Select the wireless network setting type.
Select the wireless network setting type.
Setting from the AP list
Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
Setting Ad-hoc network
ꔉ Next
Exit
Previous
Exit
Previous
4
Repeat step 4-5 on P.17.
background
24
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
This is the method of communicating directly with the machine to communicate without AP.
This is the same as connecting two PCs with a cross cable.
Ad-hoc Mode
Select the wireless network setting type.
Select the wireless network setting type.
Setting from the AP list
Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
Setting Ad-hoc network
ꔉ Next
Setting Ad-hoc network
Features using exiting network can be unavailable. Do you
want to change network connection?
ꔉ Next
OK Cancel
Setting Ad-hoc network
Insert the setting informatin into the device.
ꔉ Next
Network ID(SSID) : LGTV10
Security Key : 1111111111
Changing the setting information.
Connect
Exit
Previous
Exit
Previous
Exit
Previous
1
Repeat step 1-3 on P.21.
2
Select Setting Ad-hoc network.
3
Select OK.
4
Select Connect to connect Ad-hoc network.
You can see the Network ID and Security Key on
your TV screen.
Enter this Network ID and Security Key to your
device.
If a network may not operate, change the
setting information using the RED button.
Network Setting
Insert the IP address.
IP Mode IP Manual Setting
● IP Address 192 . 168 . 0 . 10
● Subnet Mask
255 . 255 . 255 . 0
● Gateway 192 . 168 . 0 . 1
● DNS Server 255 . 255 . 0 . 0
Previous
OK
Exit
Network Status
Adhoc network is connected.
(LGTV10)
Mac Address : 00:00:13:64:23:01
IP Address : 10.19.152.115
Subnet Mask : 255.255.254.0
Gateway : 10.19.152.1
Setting Test Close
Signal Strength
TV
Gateway
Setting Ad-hoc network
Insert the setting information into the device.
Network ID(SSID) : LGTV10
Security Key : 1111111111
Cancel
Connecting the Ad-hoc network
●
PC Setting
Internet Protocol(TCP/IP) of PC needs to be set
manually.
IP address, Subnet Mask, and default Gateway
can be set with your own discretion.
i.e) IP address: 192.168.0.1 / Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0 / default Gateway: 192.168.0.10
●
TV Setting
Verify IP address and gateway of PC.
Input Gateway address of PC to IP Address, and
IP Address of PC to Gateway, and select OK.
i.e) IP address: 192.168.0.10 / Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0 / default Gateway: 192.168.0.1
● Example of the PC setting that
supports a wireless network
1. Find a wireless network device
in your PC.
2. Select LGTV10 that appears in
the list. (Select the same name
as the network ID that appears
on your TV screen.)
3. Type 1111111111 in the Inserting
the security key dialog.
(Type the security key that
appears on your TV screen.)
5
Insert the IP address.
6
Network setting is completed.
Select Close.
background
25
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1
Select NETWORK.
2
Select Network Status.
3
Check the network status.
Network Status
■ Setting: Return to the network setting
menu or wireless network setting type
menu.
■ Test: Test the current network status
after setting the network.
■ Close: Return to the previous menu.
Wired Connection
Wireless Connection
NETWORK
OK
Move
• Network Setting : Wired
• Network Status : Not connected
• Legal Notice
• Network Status :
Internet is connected
Network Setting
Select the IP setting mode.
IP Mode
◄ IP Auto Setting ►
● IP Address 255 . 255 . 0 . 0
● Subnet Mask
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
● Gateway 255 . 255 . 0 . 0
● DNS Server 255 . 255 . 0 . 0
OK
Exit
Previous
Select the wireless network setting type.
Select the wireless network setting type.
Setting from the AP list
Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
Setting Ad-hoc network
ꔉ Next
Exit
Previous
Network Status
Network connecting
Setting Test Close
background
26
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
TURNING ON THE TV
INITIALIZING SETUP
When your TV is turned on, you will be able to use its features.
VOLUME ADJUSTMENT
PROGRAMME SELECTION
1
If the OSD (On Screen Display) is displayed on the screen after turning on the TV, you can
adjust the Language(Except for Australia, New Zealand, Singapore, South Africa), Mode
Setting,
Power Indicator(Only LED LCD TV models - When you select Home Use from Mode
Setting),
Country (Only Australia, New Zealand), Time Zone(Only Australia), Auto Tuning.
Note:
a. If you close without completing the initial setting, the Initial Setting menu can be displayed
again.
b. Press the BACK button to change the current OSD to the previous OSD.
c. For those countries without confirmed DTV broadcasting standards, some DTV features might
not work, depending on the DTV broadcasting environment.(Only DTV)
d. "Home Use” mode is the optimal setting for home environments, and is the TV's default mode.
e. "Store Demo" mode is the optimal setting for store environments. If a user modifies image quality
data, “Store Demo” mode initializes the product to the image quality set by us after a certain period
of time.
f. The mode (Home Use, Store Demo) can be changed by executing Mode Setting in the
OPTION menu.
1
Firstly, connect the power cord correctly.
At this stage, the TV switches to standby mode.
2
In standby mode to turn TV on, press the / I, INPUT or P
button on the TV or press
the POWER, INPUT, P
or NUMBER button on the remote control and the TV will
switch on.
1
Press the P or NUMBER buttons to select a programme number.
1
Press the + or - button to adjust the volume.
2
If you wish to switch the sound off, press the MUTE button.
You can cancel this function by pressing the MUTE, + , - or AV Mode button.
background
27
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Aspect Ratio: Selects your desired picture for-
mat.
For Zoom Setting, select 14:9, Zoom and
Cinema Zoom in Ratio Menu. After complet-
ing Zoom Setting, the display goes back to
Q.Menu.
Clear Voice II : By differentiating the human
sound range from others, it helps users lis-
ten to human voices better.
Picture Mode : Selects your desired Picture
Mode.
Sound Mode : It is a feature to automatical-
ly set the sound combination which it deems
the best for the images being watched.
Selects your desired Sound Mode.
Audio or Audio Language : Selects the
sound output.
Sleep Timer : Sets the sleep timer.
Skip Off/On : Selects the Skip Off/On.
USB Device : Selects “Eject” in order to eject
USB device. (Except for 22/26/32LD3**)
Energy Saving : Selects your desired Energy
Saving mode. (Only for 22/26/32LD3**)
QUICK MENU
Your TV's OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual.
Q.Menu (Quick Menu) is a menu of features which users might use frequently.
• Press the Q.MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Display each menu.
2
Select your desired Source.
3
◄
Aspect Ratio
►
16:9
Exit
◄
Aspect Ratio
►
16:9
Exit
or
background
28
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
ON SCREEN MENUS SELECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Your TV's OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual.
• Press the RED button, you can check the
Customer Support menu.
• Press the GREEN button, you can check
the Simple Manual menu.
•
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to
normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the pre-
vious menu screen.
NOTE
►It is possible to use Country menu in Australia and New Zealand only.
►It is possible to use Hard of Hearing, Parental Guidance menu in DTV only.
1
Display each menu.
2
Select a menu item.
3
Move to the pop up menu.
OK
Move
● Auto Tuning
● Manual Tuning
● Programme Edit
SETUP
SETUP
PICTURE
AUDIO
OK
Move
● Aspect Ratio : 16:9
● Picture Wizard
● ꕊ Energy Saving : Off
● Picture Mode : Standard
• Backlight 70
• Contrast 100
• Brightness 50
• Sharpness 70
PICTURE
OK
Move
● Auto Volume : Off
● Clear Voice II : Off 3
● Balance 0
● Sound Mode : Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble 50
• Bass 50
• Reset
AUDIO
L R
TIME
OK
Move
● Clock
● Off Time : Off
● On Time : Off
● Sleep Timer : Off
TIME
background
29
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
LOCK
OK
Move
● Set Password
● Lock System : Off
● Block Programme
● Parental Guidance : Blocking Off
● Input Block
● Key Lock : Off
LOCK
OPTION
INPUT
Movie List Music ListPhoto List
MY MEDIA
Exit
Option
Press OK( ) to see photos from the USB.
MY MEDIA
NETWORK
NETWORK
• Network Setting : Wired
• Network Status : Internet is connected
• Legal Notice
OK
Move
BLUETOOTH
(Only 32/37/42/47/55LE55
*
*, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***,
42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***)
●
For further information, refer to the optional
“Wireless Media Box & Wireless Dongle”
manual for operating instructions.
(Only 32/42/46/52/60LD5**, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**,
32/37/42/47/55LE53**, 32/37/42/47/55LE55**,
32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***, 32/42LE45**,
42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***, 32LE3***)
● Language(Language)
● Country : Australia
● Hard of Hearing (ꔞ) : Off
● Power Indicator
● Factory Reset
● Set ID : 1
● Mode Setting : Home Use
● IR Blaster : Off
OK
Move
OPTION
Exit
Bluetooth
Bluetooth on
Bluetooth is off.
Select 'Bluetooth On' on the left to turn on Bluetooth.
OK
Move
(Only 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**,
32/37/42/47/55LE55
*
*, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***,
42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***)
(Except for 22/26/32LD3**)
(Except for 22/26/32LD3**)
(Only 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**,
32/37/42/47/55LE55
*
*, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***,
42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***)
Antenna USB
HDMI2 HDMI3HDMI1
AV2 Component1 Component2
RGB
OK
Move
Input List
Input Label
Exit
AV1
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
GAME
GAME
JUMP
HOLE IN ONE WHACK A MOLE
SUDOKU
COOKING BURGER
SAVING CRYSTAL
INVADER
URGENT SURVIVAL
Exit
background
30
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Use this to automatically find and store all available programmes.
When you start auto programming, all previously stored service information will be deleted.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
• Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit
password in Lock System ‘On’.
• If you wish to keep on auto tuning select
Start using the
ꕌꕍ
button. Then, press
the OK button. Otherwise select Close.
• Automatic Numbering: Decide whether
to use the programme numbers as sent
by broadcasting stations for tuning. (Only
DTV)
1
Select SETUP.
2
Select Auto Tuning.
3
Select Start.
4
Run Auto tuning.
OK
Move
● Auto Tuning
● Manual Tuning
● Programme Edit
SETUP
● Auto Tuning
OK
Move
● Auto Tuning
● Manual Tuning
● Programme Edit
SETUP
● Auto Tuning
►
►
Check your antenna connection. The
previous channel information will be
updated during Auto Tuning.
Automatic Numbering
Start
Close
Antenna
Antenna
AUTO PROGRAMME TUNING
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
background
31
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING
Manual Tuning lets you manually add a programme to your programme list.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
(IN DIGITAL MODE)(ONLY DTV)
• Use NUMBER
buttons to input a 4-digit
password in Lock System ‘On’.
1
Select SETUP.
2
Select Manual Tuning.
3
Select DTV.
4
Select the desired channel number.
Update.
5
OK
Move
● Auto Tuning
● Manual Tuning
● Programme Edit
SETUP
● Manual Tuning
OK
Move
● Auto Tuning
● Manual Tuning
● Programme Edit
SETUP
● Manual Tuning
►
►
Frequency(kHz) 474000
◄
DTV
►
UHF CH.
30
Close
Update
● Signal Strength
50%
● Signal Quality
50%
background
32
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING
(IN ANALOGUE MODE)
Manual Tuning lets you manually tune and arrange the stations in whatever order you desire.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select SETUP.
2
Select Manual Tuning.
3
Select TV.(Only DTV)
4
or
Select the desired
channel Storage.
5
Select a TV system.
(Except for Australia)
6
Select V/UHF or Cable.
or
7
Select the desired
channel number.
8
Commence searching.
9
Select Store.
OK
Move
● Auto Tuning
● Manual Tuning
● Programme Edit
SETUP
● Manual Tuning
OK
Move
● Auto Tuning
● Manual Tuning
● Programme Edit
SETUP
● Manual Tuning
►
►
●
Storage
◄
TV
►
3
●
System
BG
●
Band
V/UHF
●
Channel
◄ ►
◄ ►
●
Fine
●
Search
0
●
Name
C 02
Close
Store
• Use NUMBER
buttons to input a 4-digit password in Lock System ‘On’.
• BG : PAL B/G (New Zealand / South Africa / Singapore / Indonesia / Israel / Malaysia / Vietnam / Asia)
DK : PAL D/K (New Zealand / South Africa / Singapore / Indonesia / Israel / Malaysia / Vietnam / Asia)
I : PAL I/II (New Zealand / South Africa / Singapore / Indonesia / Israel / Malaysia / Vietnam / Asia)
B/B : Australia
M : NTSC-M (South Africa / Indonesia / Israel / Malaysia / Vietnam / Asia)
• To store another channel, repeat steps 4 to 9.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
background
33
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
You can assign a station name with five characters to each programme number.
■ Assigning a station name
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select SETUP.
2
Select Manual Tuning.
3
Select TV. (Only DTV)
4
Select Name.
5
Select the position and make
your choice of the second
character, and so on.
You can use an the alphabet
A to Z, the number 0 to 9, +/
-, and blank.
6
Select Close.
7
Select Store.
Normally fine tuning is only necessary if reception is poor.
■ Fine Tuning
Select TV. (Only DTV)
Select Fine.
Select SETUP.
Select Manual Tuning.
Select Store.
6
Fine tune for the best picture
and sound.
1
3
2
4
5
OK
Move
● Auto Tuning
● Manual Tuning
● Programme Edit
SETUP
● Manual Tuning
OK
Move
● Auto Tuning
● Manual Tuning
● Programme Edit
SETUP
● Manual Tuning
►
►
●
Storage
◄
TV
►
3
●
System
BG
●
Band
V/UHF
●
Channel
◄ ►
◄ ►
●
Fine
●
Search
0
●
Name
C 02
Close
Store
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
(IN ANALOGUE MODE)
background
34
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
PROGRAMME EDIT
When a programme number is skipped, it means that you will be unable to select it using P but-
ton during TV viewing.
If you wish to select the skipped programme, directly enter the programme number with the NUMBER
buttons or select it in the Programme edit menu.
This function enables you to skip the stored programmes.
You can change the programme number using “Move”function, if “Automatic Numbering” is unchecked
when you start Auto Tuning.(Only DTV)
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select SETUP.
2
Select Programme Edit.
3
Enter the Programme Edit.
4
Select a programme to be stored or
skipped.
Previous
Page Change
P
Block/Unblock Skip
Pr. Change
DTV
RADIO
TV
800 YLE TV1
803 YLE24
806 Kanal Lokal
809 TV4 Plus
812 TV4 Fakta
815 Demo
818 24H TVE
801 YLE TV2
804 YLE Teema
807 CNN
802 YLE FST
805 TV4 Stockholm
808 TV4
810 TV400
813
MediaCorp HD5
811 TV4 Film
814 SNY_SSU
816 TVE 1 817 TVE 2
819 CLAN/50 TVE 820 LA7
Page 1/2
Programme Edit
Favourite Group :
A
▼
Favourite Pr. Group
Q.MENU
Favourite Pr.
FAV
OK
Move
● Auto Tuning
● Manual Tuning
● Programme Edit
SETUP
● Programme Edit
►
►
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
background
35
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
■ Skipping a programme number
IN DTV/RADIO MODE
• When programmes are to be skipped, the
skipped programme shows in blue and
these programmes will not be selected by
the P ꕌꕍ buttons during TV viewing.
• If you wish to select a skipped programme,
directly enter the programme number with
the NUMBER buttons or select it in the
programme edit or EPG.
1
Select a programme number to be skipped.
2
BLUE
Turn the programme number to blue.
3
BLUE
Release.
■ Locking a programme number
1
Select a programme number to be locked.
2
YELLOW
Lock up the programme.
3
YELLOW
Release.
• It can be registered as Lock
programme even when Lock
System is turned Off.
(Only DTV)
background
36
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
■ Skipping a programme number
• When a programme number is skipped it
means that you will be unable to select it
using the P ꕌꕍ button during normal TV
viewing.
• If you wish to select a skipped programme,
directly enter the programme number with
the NUMBER buttons or select it in the
programme edit.
1
Select a programme number to be skipped.
2
BLUE
Turn the programme number to blue.
3
BLUE
Release.
■ Locking a programme number
1
Select a programme number to be locked.
2
YELLOW
Lock up the programme.
3
YELLOW
Release.
• It can be registered as Lock
programme even when Lock
System is turned Off.
■ Moving a programme
1
Select a programme number to be moved.
2
GREEN
Turn the programme number to
green.
3
GREEN
Release.
This function enables you to delete or skip the stored programmes.
You can also move some channels and use other programme numbers.
IN TV MODE
■ Deleting a programme
• The selected programme is deleted, all the
following programmes are shifted up one.
1
Select a programme number to be deleted.
2
RED
Turn the programme number to red.
background
37
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
■ Selecting favourite programme
1
Select your desired programme.
2
MARK
FAV
Add corresponding programme to Favourite
list of current Favourite group.
3
MARK
FAV
Release.
Favorite programmes is a convenient feature that lets you quickly scan up to programmes of your
choice without having to wait for the TV to scan through all the in-between programmes.
■ Selecting favourite programme group
1
Select your desired programme.
2
Display a pop-up window where
Favourite group can be changed.
3
Select a Favourite group.
background
38
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
SOFTWARE UPDATE
1
Select Customer Support.
2
Select Software Update.
3
Select On or Off.
• If you select On, a user confirm message box will
be displayed to notify that new software is found.
4
Save.
RED
You can update the TV with the latest software to enhance the product operation and/or add new features.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
(Except for 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**, 32/37/42/47/55LE55
*
*, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***,
42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***)
Software Update
Close
● Current version
00.00.01
◄ On ►
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Software Update
Picture Test
Sound Test
Signal Test
Product/Service Info.
Software Update
Close
Exit
Customer Support
Simple Manual
Press OK( ) to set programme settings.
SETUP PICTURE
LOCK
OPTION
TIME
MY MEDIA
AUDIO
INPUT
background
39
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Occasionally, a transmission of
updated digital software infor-
mation will result in the following
menu on the TV screen.
Simple Update : for current
update stream
Schedule Update : for scheduled
update stream
A window as display below
appears when download
completes.
TV is restarted when "Yes"
button is pressed.
When the Software Update menu
is "Off", the message to change it
to "On" appears.
Download starts when "Yes" is
selected. At this time, pro-
gressing pop-up window does
not display.
Download progress status can
be checked from Software
Update menu.
Yes
No
Software update is available.
Would you like to download now?
?
Yes
No
A new software update is available at
00/00/0 00:00.
Do you want to update the software when
available?
?
Yes
No
New software version is ready. If you want
to install now, TV will be turned off and
restart. Continue?
Software Update
Close
Software downloading progress.
Ver. 00.00.01 ► Ver.00.00.00
◄ On ►
4%
- During Progress of a Software Update, please note the following:
• Power to the TV must not be interrupted.
• After Software Update, you can confirm the updated software version in Software Update menu.
• It may take hours to download the software, so make sure that the power stays on during the download.
<Simple Update, Schedule Update>
• The antenna must not be disconnected.
• The software is downloaded only in Standby mode or in MUX with Software Update Service, and stops
when the power cord is unplugged or when viewing MUX without Software Update Service.
• When you return to Standby mode or MUX with Software Update Service, the software download will
resume from where it stopped.
■ When setting “Software Update”
background
40
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
1
Select Customer Support.
2
Select Software Update.
3
Select On or Off.
• If you select On, a user confirm message box will
be displayed to notify that new software is found.
4
Save.
RED
Exit
Customer Support
Simple Manual
Press OK( ) to set programme settings.
SETUP PICTURE
LOCK
OPTION
TIME
MY MEDIA
AUDIO
BLUETOOTH
NETWORK
Software Update
Check Update Version
Close
● Current version
00.00.01
◄ On ►
GAME
• Use the Check Update Version to update
the latest software on the Network server
manually.
You can update the TV with the latest software to enhance the product operation and/or add new features.
You can update the software by connecting the TV directly to the software update server.
The Software Update function may not work properly depending on your internet environment. In this case, you
can obtain the latest software from the authorized LG Electronics Service Center then update your TV.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
Software Update
Picture Test
Sound Test
Signal Test
Product/Service Info.
Network Test
Software Update
Close
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
(Only 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**, 32/37/42/47/55LE55
*
*, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***,
42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***)
SOFTWARE UPDATE
background
41
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
■ When setting “Software Update”
Occasionally, a transmission of
updated digital software infor-
mation will result in the following
menu on the TV screen.
Simple Update : for current
update stream
Schedule Update : for scheduled
update stream
When the Software Update menu
is "Off", the message to change it
to "On" appears.
Download starts when "Yes" is
selected.
Download progress status can
be checked from Software
Update menu.
- During Progress of a Software Update, please note the following:
• Power to the TV must not be interrupted.
• After Software Update, you can confirm the updated software version in Software Update menu.
• It may take hours to download the software, so make sure that the power stays on during the download.
<Simple Update, Schedule Update>
• The antenna must not be disconnected.
• The software is downloaded only in Standby mode or in MUX with Software Update Service, and stops
when the power cord is unplugged or when viewing MUX without Software Update Service.
• When you return to Standby mode or MUX with Software Update Service, the software download will
resume from where it stopped.
<Network Update>
• You cannot open NetCast while the software is being updated.
• Do not release the Network connection during Update.
• When there is a new software update when you open NetCast, you will not be able to use NetCast with-
out updating the software.
Yes
No
Software update is available.
Would you like to download now?
?
Yes
No
A new software update is available at
00/00/0 00:00.
Do you want to update the software when
available?
?
Software Update
Close
Software downloading progress.
Ver. 00.00.01 ► Ver.00.00.02
◄ On ►
4%
Check Update Version
When new Software is available
when connected to Internet, the
following message will be dis-
played.
Starting Update
Remind me later
New software version is ready. Do you
want to update it?
?
TV is restarted when
download is completed.
Update is completed.
Rebooting now.
background
42
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
PICTURE/SOUND TEST
This function is a customer support function that can execute picture and sound tests.
1
Select Customer Support.
2
Select Picture Test or Sound Test.
3
Select Yes or No.
RED
Yes No
Do you have a problem in this test
screen?
?
Exit
Customer Support
Simple Manual
Press OK( ) to set programme settings.
PICTURE
LOCK
OPTION
TIME
MY MEDIA
AUDIO
BLUETOOTH
NETWORK
GAME
SETUP
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
Software Update
Picture Test
Sound Test
Signal Test
Product/Service Info.
Network Test
Picture Test
Close
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
background
43
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
SIGNAL TEST
This function enables you to view information on the Manufacturer, Model/Type and Software Version.
This displays the information and signal strength of the tuned *MUX.
This displays the signal information and service name of the selected MUX.
(*MUX: A higher directory of channels in digital broadcasting (a single MUX contains multiple chan-
nels.))
Engineering Diagnostics
Manufacturer : LG Electronics Inc.
Model/Type : 42LE7500-TA
Software Version : V00.00.01
Ch 34
Ch 36
Ch 38
Ch 54
Ch 60
Exit
MENU
Prev.
Popup
Ch 30
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select Customer Support.
2
Select Signal Test.
3
Display Manufacturer, Model/Type and Software Version.
4
Display the information of Channel.
RED
Exit
Customer Support
Simple Manual
Press OK( ) to set programme settings.
PICTURE
LOCK
OPTION
TIME
MY MEDIA
AUDIO
BLUETOOTH
NETWORK
GAME
SETUP
(Only DTV)
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Software Update
Picture Test
Sound Test
Signal Test
Product/Service Info.
Network Test
Signal Test
Close
background
44
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
PRODUCT/SERVICE INFORMATION
This function is a customer support function that can see product/service information and customer service center
information.
1
Select Customer Support.
2
Select Product/Service Info..
3
Display Model/Type, Software version, Serial Number,
Used time, Customer service center and Homepage.
RED
Exit
Customer Support
Simple Manual
Press OK( ) to set programme settings.
PICTURE
LOCK
OPTION
TIME
MY MEDIA
AUDIO
BLUETOOTH
NETWORK
GAME
SETUP
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
Software Update
Picture Test
Sound Test
Signal Test
Product/Service Info.
Network Test
Product/Service Info.
Close
background
45
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
NETWORK TEST
Check the network status.
Software Update
Picture Test
Sound Test
Signal Test
Product/Service Info.
Network Test
Network Test
Close
1
Select Customer Support.
2
Select Network Test.
3
Check the network status.
RED
Exit
Customer Support
Simple Manual
Press OK( ) to set programme settings.
PICTURE
LOCK
OPTION
TIME
MY MEDIA
AUDIO
GAME
SETUP
NETWORK
BLUETOOTH
Network Status
Network connecting
Setting Test Close
(Only 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**, 32/37/42/47/55LE55
*
*, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***,
42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***)
background
46
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
SIMPLE MANUAL
You can easily and effectively access the TV information by viewing a simple manual on the TV.
During the Simple Manual operation, audio will be muted.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
1
GREEN
Select Simple Manual.
2
Select the part of the manual you want
to see.
Exit
Customer Support
Simple Manual
Press OK( ) to set programme settings.
PICTURE
LOCK
OPTION
TIME
MY MEDIA
AUDIO
BLUETOOTH
NETWORK
GAME
SETUP
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
• RED : Go to the Index page.
• BLUE : Play the Simple Manual automatically
or manually.
background
47
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
SELECTING THE PROGRAMME LIST
You can check which programmes are stored in the memory by displaying the programme list.
Displayed when the
Locked Programme.
Mini Glossary
■ Displaying programme LIST
■ Selecting a programme in the programme list
• You may find some blue programmes.
These have been set up to be skipped by
auto programming or in the programme
edit mode.
• Some programmes with the channel num-
ber shown in the programme LIST indicate
there is no station name assigned.
1
Display the Programme List.
1
Select a programme.
2
Switch to the chosen programme number.
BLUE
Turn the programme edit.
Programme List
1 BBC
2 BBC
3 BBC
4 BBC
Pr.Edit
Exit
►
5 BBC
A
The mode will be switched
between TV, DTV, and Radio
from the programme you are
currently watching.(Only DTV)
background
48
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
■ Displaying the favourite programme
list
■ Paging through a programme list
Turn the pages.
2
Return to normal TV viewing.
1
Display the Favourite Programme List.
BLUE
Turn the programme edit.
YELLOW
Current channel is registered/
cancelled as preferred channel on
currently selected Group.
Favourite group is changed.
Favourite List
1 BBC
2 BBC
3 BBC
Group B◄ ►
◄ ►Favourite Pr. Group
►
►
Pr.Edit
Pr.Reg.
Exit
1
background
49
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
• Antenna : Select it when watching the TV.
(Only DTV : Select it when watching the
DTV/TV/RADIO.)
• USB : Select it when using USB depends
on connector.
• AV : Select it when watching the VCR or
external equipment.
• Component : Select it when using the
DVD or the Digital set-top box depends on
connector.
• RGB :Select it when using PC depends on
connector.
• HDMI : Select it when using DVD, PC or
Digital set-top box depend on connector.
INPUT LIST
By using TV/RAD button, you can move from External Input to RF Input and to the last watched pro-
gramme in DTV/RADIO/TV mode.(Only DTV)
1
Select the input source.
Antenna USB1
HDMI2 HDMI3HDMI1
AV2 Component1 Component2
RGB
OK
Move
Input List
Input Label
Exit
AV1
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
background
50
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
INPUT LABEL
Selects a label for each input source.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select Input Label.
2
Select the source.
3
Select the label.
BLUE
Input Label
AV1
AV2
Component1
Component2
RGB
Close
▼
◄
◄
◄
◄
◄
►
►
►
►
►
Antenna USB1
HDMI2 HDMI3HDMI1
AV2 Component1 Component2
RGB
OK
Move
Input List
Input Label
Exit
AV1
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
background
51
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
DATA SERVICE
(This menu is enabled only in South Africa, Malaysia. )
This function allow users to choose between MHEG(Digital Teletext) and Teletext if both exist at the same
time.
If only one of them exists, either MHEG or Teletext is enabled regardless of which option you select-
ed.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select OPTION.
2
Select Data Service.
3
Select MHEG or Teletext.
4
Save.
OK
Move
● Language(Language)
● Hard of Hearing (ꔞ) : Off
● Power Indicator
● Data Service : MHEG
● Factory Reset
● Set ID : 1
● Mode Setting : Home Use
OPTION
● Data Service : MHEG
►
OK
Move
● Language(Language)
● Hard of Hearing (ꔞ) : Off
● Power Indicator
● Data Service : MHEG
● Factory Reset
● Set ID : 1
● Mode Setting : Home Use
OPTION
● Data Service : MHEG
►
MHEG
Teletext
MHEG
►
background
52
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
SIMPLINK
This function operates only with devices with the SIMPLINK logo.
Please check the SIMPLINK logo.
This TV might not function properly when using it with other products with HDMI-CEC function.
This allows you to control and play other AV devices connected to the display through HDMI cable
without additional cables and settings.
If you do not want to use SIMPLINK function, select “Off”.
In wireless external output, SIMPLINK function is not supported.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Display the SIMPLINK.
2
Select On or Off.
3
Save.
◄ On ►
Watch TV
DISC
VCR
VCR
Speaker
TV Speaker
HDD Recorder
◄ ►
OK
Exit
background
53
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Connecting to Home Theater with the SIMPLINK logo.
NOTE
► Connect the HDMI/DVI IN or HDMI IN terminal of the TV to the terminal (HDMI terminal) of the SIMPLINK
device with the HDMI cable.
► When you switch the Input source using the INPUT button on the remote control, you can stop the opera-
tion of a device controlled by SIMPLINK.
► When you select or operate a media device with
home theater function, the speaker automatically
switches to home theater speaker (HT speaker).
1
Connect the
HDMI/DVI IN 1, HDMI/DVI IN
2(Except for 22LD3**), HDMI IN 3(Except for
22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LD4**, 22LE5***)
or HDMI IN 4 (Only 32/37/42/47/55LE5***,
32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***,
42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***,
32/42/47/55LE4***, 32LE3***)
terminal on the
back of the TV and the HDMI output terminal of
the Home Theater using HDMI cables.
2
Connect the Digital Audio output terminal on
the back of the TV and the Digital Audio input
terminal of the Home Theater using optical
cables.
3
Select Home Theater in the Speaker menu by
pushing the SIMPLINK button.
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
COMPONENT IN
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
/DVI IN
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
/DVI IN
IN 3
H/P
AV IN2
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AV IN2
IN 3
H/P
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
/DVI IN
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
R
L/MONO
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
AV IN1
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
1 2
Home Theater
background
54
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
SIMPLINK Menu
Press the
button and then OK button to select the desired SIMPLINK source.
TV viewing : Switch to the previous TV pro-
gramme regardless of the current mode.
DISC playback : Select and play connected
discs.
When multiple discs are available, the device
type of discs are conveniently displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
VCR playback : Play and control the con-
nected VCR.
HDD Recordings playback : Play and con-
trol recordings stored in HDD.
Audio Out to Home theater/Audio Out to
TV: Select Home theater or TV speaker for
Audio Out.
1
2
3
4
5
◄ On ►
Watch TV
DISC
VCR
VCR
Speaker
TV Speaker
HDD Recorder
◄ ►
OK
Exit
Selected Device
When a device is con-
nected (displayed in
bright colour)
When device is not con-
nected (displayed in
gray)
1
2
3
4
5
Disc playback
Control connected AV devices by pressing the
, OK, ►,
▀
, l l, ◄◄ and ►►
buttons.
Direct Play
After connecting AV devices to the TV, you can directly control the devices and play media without additional set-
tings.
Select AV device
Enables you to select one of the AV devices connected to the TV and operate it.
Power off all devices
When you switch off the TV, all connected devices are turned off.
Switch audio-out
Offers an easy way to switch audio-out.
Sync Power on
When the equipment with Simplink function connected HDMI terminal starts to play, The TV will change automatically
to turn on mode.
* A device, which is connected to the TV through an HDMI cable but does not support SIMPLINK,
does not provide this function.
Note: To operate SIMPLINK, an High Speed HDMI Cable with *CEC function should be used.
(*CEC: Consumer Electronics Control).
SIMPLINK Functions
background
55
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Off Cinema
Game Sport
AV MODE
You can select the optimal images and sounds when connecting AV devices to external input.
Off Disables the AV MODE.
Cinema Optimizes video and audio for watching movies.
Sport/Cricket Optimizes video and audio for watching sports events.
Game Optimizes video and audio for playing games.
• If you select Cinema in AV mode, Cinema will be selected both for Picture Mode and Sound
Mode in PICTURE menu and AUDIO menu respectively.
• If you select “Off” in AV mode, the picture and image which you initially set will be selected.
• When playing a video game using PlayStation or Xbox, it is recommended to use the Game
mode.
• When in Game mode, functions related to picture quality will be optimized for playing games.
1
A
V MODE
Press the AV MODE button repeatedly to select the desired source.
2
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
background
56
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
INITIALIZING(RESET TO ORIGINAL FACTORY SETTINGS)
This function initializes all settings.
But the settings of Day and Night of the Picture Mode cannot be initialized.
It is useful to initialize the product or when you move to other city or country.
When the Factory Reset is completed, you must restart the Initializing setup.
When the Lock System menu is "On", the message to enter the password appears.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
• In Lock System "On", if you forget your
password, press '0', '3', '2', '5' on the
remote control handset.
1
Select OPTION.
2
Select Factory Reset.
3
Select Yes.
4
Start Factory Reset.
OK
Move
● Language(Language)
● Country : Australia
● Hard of Hearing (ꔞ) : Off
● Power Indicator
● Factory Reset
● Set ID : 1
● Mode Setting : Home Use
● IR Blaster : Off
OPTION
● Factory Reset
Yes
No
All user settings and channel settings will
be reset. Still Continue?
OK
Move
● Language(Language)
● Country : Australia
● Hard of Hearing (ꔞ) : Off
● Power Indicator
● Factory Reset
● Set ID : 1
● Mode Setting : Home Use
● IR Blaster : Off
OPTION
● Factory Reset
►
►
background
57
NETCAST
NETCAST
LEGAL NOTICE
1
Select NETWORK.
2
Select Legal Notice.
3
Check Legal notice.
NETWORK
OK
Move
• Network Setting : Wired
• Network Status : Internet is connected
• Legal Notice
• Legal Notice
►
Legal Notice
▼
Close
IMPORTANT NOTICE RELATING TO NETWORK SERVICE All content and services
accessible through this device belong to third parties and are protected by copyright, patent,
trademark and/or other intellectual property laws. Such content and services are provided
solely for your personal noncommercial use. You may not use any content or services in a
manner that has not been authorized by the content owner or service provider. Without
limiting the foregoing, unless expressly authorized by the applicable content owner or service
provider, you may not copy, upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, modify, create
derivative works, or distribute in any manner o r medium any content or services displayed
through this device.YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE DEVICE AND
ALL THIRD PARTY CONTENT AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. LG ELECTRONICS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO ANY CONTENT AND SERVICES, EITHER
EXPRESS OR, IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
Page 1/3
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
(Only 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**, 32/37/42/47/55LE55
*
*, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***,
42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***)
This feature is not available in all countries.
background
58
NETCAST
NETCAST
IMPORTANT NOTICE RELATING TO NETWORK SERVICEIMPORTANT NOTICE RELATING TO NETWORK SERVICES
All content and services accessible through this device belong to third parties and are protected by
copyright, patent, trademark and/or other intellectual property laws. Such content and services are
provided solely for your personal noncommercial use. You may not use any content or services in a
manner that has not been authorized by the content owner or service provider. Without limiting the
foregoing, unless expressly authorized by the applicable content owner or service provider, you may
not copy, upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, modify, create derivative works, or distribute in any
manner or medium any content or services displayed through this device.
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE DEVICE AND ALL THIRD PARTY
CONTENT AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. LG ELECTRONICS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO ANY CONTENT AND SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS OR,
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. LG DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY,
TIMELINESS, LEGALITY, OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE MADE
AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE AND DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE DEVICE OR
SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT OPERATION OF THE DEVICE OR
SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES,
INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL LG BE LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR ANY CONTENT
OR SERVICE ACCESSED BY YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Third party services may be changed, suspended, removed, terminated or interrupted, or access
may be disabled at any time, without notice, and LG makes no representation or warranty that any
content or service will remain available for any period of time. Content and services are transmitted
by third parties by means of networks and transmission facilities over which LG has no control. LG
may impose limits on the use of or access to certain services or content, in any case and without
notice or liability. LG expressly disclaims any responsibility or liability for any change, interruption,
disabling, removal of or suspension of any content or service made available through this device.
LG is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to the content and services. Any
question or request for service relating to the content or services should be made directly to the
respective content and service providers.
background
59
NETCAST
NETCAST MENU
1
Select NETCAST menu option.
2
Enjoy the Weather info, Photo Album or Movie
Online.
These services are provided by separate Content Provider.
Content can be changed or deleted depending on Content Provider.
All content furnished by the service provider are subject to change at any time including, but not limited
to the removal of content. Should you have any inquiry or problem related to the content, you may refer
to the service provider’s website for the most up-to-date information. Please note that LGE is not respon-
sible for any content provided by the service provider or any changes concerning such content.
Please visit the content providers web site for specific information on their services. (But, some content
manual maybe not provide depending on Content Provider).
NetCast menu source can differ by country.
Photo
Album
Movie
Online
Weather
info
NOTE
► The videos list searched from the TV may different with the list searched from a web browser on
PC.
► The settings of this TV do not affect the Movie Online’s playback quality.
► The playback videos may be paused, stopped or buffering occurring often depending on your
broadband speed.
We recommend a minimum connection speed of 1.5 Mbps. For the best playback condition, a con-
nection speed of 4.0 Mbps is required. Sometimes your broadband speed varies based on your
ISP’s network conditions. Contact your ISP if you have problems maintaining a fast connection that
is reliable, or if you want to increase your connection speed. Many ISPs offer a variety of broad-
band speed options.
►To view the owner’s manual that provided by the Content Provider, visit our website at http://
www.lg.com.
►For service that requires log in, join the applicable service on the website using the PC and log
in through the TV to enjoy various additional functionalities.
►When you set the city you want with Setup by pressing the red button, the background of
NetCast will be set to the weather of the selected city.
• Press the RED button to select Weather of area.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
background
60
NETCAST
NETCAST
Movie Online
Movie Online is a video sharing website where users can upload, view, and share video clips.
Movie Online Screen Components
1
Movie Online menu
2
Videos list
NOTE
► When you press the Q.menu button while the Movie Online video is playing in full mode, you can set the
video options.
RED
Set the option menu.
Return to NetCast menu.
Return to TV viewing.
1
2
background
61
NETCAST
● Home: You can watch the popular video in real time.
● Featured: The featured videos list will be displayed.
● Popular: The best rated videos list from Movie Online server will be displayed.
● MostViewed: The most viewed videos list will be displayed.
● Search: The keypad/keyboard menu will be displayed.
● History: The videos list that you previously played will be displayed. Maximum of 20 videos can be
stored.
● Favorites: In sign-in status, this menu will be displayed the videos list that is arranged in the
Movie Online server with your account (Some videos may not appear on the Favorites list, even if the
videos are arranged in the server).
● Signin(SignOut): Displays the keypad/keyboard menu to sign in or returns to the sign-out status.
Movie Online Service menu
■ Stops the video and displays related videos list.
II Pause the video while it is playing.
► Play the selected video.
Skip the playback forward or backward.
RED
Set the option menu.
Return to NetCast menu.
Return to TV viewing.
Using the remote control
background
62
NETCAST
NETCAST
WEATHER INFO
Weather info is the programme to view the weather of the city the user wants.
Weather info Screen Components
1
Weather info menu
2
Weather list by city
3
Corresponding buttons on the
remote control
●Home: The weather of selected city is displayed.
●FavoriteCity: Frequently checked cities can be registered to check the weather.
Weather info
Service menu
1
2
3
RED
Change between Celsius and Fahrenheit.
Move the focus to the menu you want.
Select the focused menu.
Return to NetCast menu.
Return to TV viewing.
NOTE
►By default, New York, London and Paris are registered and the user can add/delete cities from
Favorite City.
►LG is not responsible for the accuracy of the weather forecast.
►Applicable weather information can differ from the actual weather depending on the information
provided by Weather info.
background
63
NETCAST
PHOTO ALBUM
Photo Album is an application that appreciates digital image files.
Photo Album Screen Components
1
Photo Album menu
2
Photos list
3
Corresponding buttons on the
remote control
1
2
3
Select the desired photo.
The selected photo file is displayed.
Return to NetCast menu.
Return to TV viewing.
●Home: The featured photos list will be displayed.
●Friends: You can register users with the pictures you want as friends. You can add up to 10 friends.
●Search: The keypad/keyboard menu will be displayed.
●MyPhotos: You can view the pictures uploaded to the Web. This function can only be used when
you sign in.
●Signin(SignOut): Displays the keypad/keyboard menu to sign in or returns to the sign-out status.
Photo Album Service menu
background
64
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
TO USE THE BLUETOOTH
(Only 32/37/42/47/55LE55**, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***)
QDID(Qualified Design Identity) : B015199
Precautions when using the Bluetooth
► Use within 7 m (-45° to 45°) range.
► If you use the device out of the range or within the range with obstacles, it can result in communication
error.
► Communication error can occur depending on the surrounding devices.
► Products using the same frequency of 2.4 GHz (Wireless LAN, microwave oven etc.), can cause communi-
cation error by using the same frequency bandwidth.
► The device search time differs depending on the number of Bluetooth devices and the operating situation.
► The probability of search increases with less number of devices.
► Electromagnetic wave can be interfered with applicable wireless devices.
► Because applicable wireless devices have the possibility of electromagnetic wave interference, they cannot
provide services related to human life.
► You can only connect one Bluetooth device at a time.
► You cannot receive photos(only JPEG) or listen to music from other Bluetooth devices while using the
Bluetooth headset.
► For details of Bluetooth, refer to the user manual of the Bluetooth device.
► Operation is subject to the following two conditions : (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
► Bluetooth can be used about 30 seconds after the power is turned on.
► Depending on the transmission processing method and performance of the headset used, the audio can be
instantly disconnected.
BLUETOOTH?
Bluetooth is a short distance networking technology using 2.4 GHz frequency to connect various types
of information devices such as computers, cell phones and PDAs, as well as digital appliances
through wireless connection, without having to connect any cable, to enable data exchange.
With the Bluetooth communication function, you can connect the Bluetooth enabled wireless headset
or receive images(only JPEG), listen to music from the Bluetooth enabled cell phone using this TV.
• Communication Spec.: Bluetooth Specification Version 2.0 + EDR (Enhanced Data Rate)
• Output: Bluetooth Specification Power Class 2
• Maximum Communication Range: Line of open sight approx. 10 m (30 ft)
• Frequency Band: 2.4 GHz band (2.4 GHz to 2.4835 GHz)
• Bluetooth Module: RBFS-B721A (LG Electronics)
• Compatible Bluetooth Profile : GAVDP(Generic Audio/Video Distribution Profile)
A2DP(Advanced Audio Distribution Profile)
OPP(Object Push Profile)
BIP(Basic Imaging Profile)
FTP(File Transfer Profile)
0700
background
65
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
SETTING THE BLUETOOTH
If you want to listen to the broadcasted sound using the Bluetooth headset or receive the jpeg images
from an external device and view them on the TV, listen to music from cell phone(Bluetooth device),
you can use the wireless communication without having to connect any cables.
You can use the BLUETOOTH menu by selecting “Bluetooth on”.
If you do not want to use the Bluetooth function, select “Bluetooth off”.
If it is connected to the external Bluetooth device, you can select “Bluetooth off” after disconnecting
the device.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select BLUETOOTH.
2
Select Bluetooth on.
Exit
Bluetooth
Bluetooth on
Bluetooth is off.
Select 'Bluetooth On' on the left to turn on Bluetooth.
OK
Move
Exit
Customer Support
Simple Manual
Press OK( ) to set programme settings.
PICTURE
LOCK
OPTION
TIME
MY MEDIA
AUDIO
BLUETOOTH
NETWORK
GAME
SETUP
background
66
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
66
You can only search for the new Bluetooth headset only in the Disconnected condition.
When you run the search, it will show you the list of all Bluetooth headsets responding.
After new Bluetooth device is searched, the PIN number is validated to connect the device. For
details, refer to the user manual of the applicable device.
When you select the Bluetooth headset, you can listen to the TV sound in the Bluetooth headset
through wireless communication.
You must pair it with any new Bluetooth device before the first use. For details, refer to the user manu-
al of the applicable device.
A maximum of 12 devices can be paired.
When the unit is searching for the Bluetooth headset, other buttons except for the “Stop” (OK button)
do not work.
BLUETOOTH HEADSET
Connecting a new Bluetooth headset
My Info
Exit
Bluetooth
Bluetooth off
No Bluetooth device.
OK
Move
Search headset
Stop searching
Searching Bluetooth headset
1/1
42LE7500-TA New
2
Select Search headset.
3
Select the desired Bluetooth
headset.
4
1
.,;@
2
abc
3
def
4
ghi
5
jkl
6
mno
7
pqrs
8
tuv
0
[
9
wxyz
Select the desired Bluetooth headset
PIN number. Refer to the user manual
of the applicable device for the PIN
number.
5
Connect the Bluetooth headset.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select BLUETOOTH.
background
67
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth headsets are listed in the order most recently used with the headset currently in use listed
at the top.
When connecting to the Bluetooth device already registered, you can select and connect directly
without any PIN validation.
Connecting to Bluetooth headset already registered
• After connecting/using the Bluetooth headset, the headset setting will be the Disconnected condi-
tion automatically when you turn off the power of the TV and then turn on.
• After connecting the Bluetooth headset, the TV speaker is switched to Mute condition and the
sound will only be generated from the headset.
2
Select the desired Bluetooth headset.
3
Connect the Bluetooth headset.
1
Select BLUETOOTH.
My Info
Remove device
Exit
Bluetooth
Bluetooth off
OK
Move
Search headset
DR-BT140Q PLT 510 sgh-e760 No device
1/1
Exit
Bluetooth
OK
Move
Disconnect
PLT 510
00:19:7f:ff:4a:1a
Bluetooth headset is connected.
Bluetooth off
My Info
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal
TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the
previous menu screen.
Disconnecting the Bluetooth headset during use
1
Select BLUETOOTH.
2
Select Disconnect.
3
Select Disconnect.
4
Disconnect the Bluetooth headset.
Exit
Bluetooth
OK
Move
Disconnect
PLT 510
00:19:7f:ff:4a:1a
Do you want to disconnect headset?
My Info
Bluetooth off
CancelDisconnect
Exit
Bluetooth
OK
Move
Disconnect
PLT 510
00:19:7f:ff:4a:1a
Bluetooth headset is connected.
Bluetooth off
My Info
• Press the EXIT button to return to nor-
mal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the
previous menu screen.
background
68
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
When requesting to connect to TV from the Bluetooth headset
When the Bluetooth menu is "On" and there is a connection request
from the headset, this message is displayed.
Not all headsets support the this feature.(Refer to the user manual of
the applicable Bluetooth headset.)
Some headset types may make an attempt at connection when they
are turned off/on even though they are not included in the
Registered Device list.
Do you want to use your headset?
Yes No
1
Select Yes or No.
NOTE
► LG recommends the following headset mod-
els.
-Plantronics VOYAGER-855 / SONY HBH-
DS970, HBH-DS980 / Motorola S605
There might be an audio delay, depending on
the buffer memory size of the headset.
► The stereo headset officially certified to be Bluetooth
compatible can be searched and connected.
► The stereo headset that supports the A2DP function
among the Bluetooth devices can be connected.
► If the surrounding environment of the TV is as follows,
the device may not be searched or connected properly.
-If there is strong electromagnetic wave.
-If there are many Bluetooth devices.
-If the headset is turned off, not in place or has an error.
-Because products such as microwave oven, wireless
LAN, plasma light, gas range etc., use the same fre-
quency range, it can cause communication error.
► Only one Bluetooth headset can be connected at once.
► Connection that is lost due to the TV being turned off etc.
will not be automatically recovered. Try connecting the
applicable device again.
► Some operations can be slower while operating the head-
set.
► Even if you choose simplink Home Theater after using the
headset during Simplink operation, the unit will not auto-
matically switch to Home Theater speakers.
► When the headset connection continuously fails, pair the
device one more time.
► When a Bluetooth headset is in use, the Volume +/- and
Mute keys do not work, and the Audio menu returns to the
default value and is disabled.
► With Bluetooth set to On, if any registered devices are
turned on, the TV will switch to Bluetooth mode automati-
cally even though you are watching in another input
mode. In this case, set Bluetooth to Off.
background
69
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
REMOVE THE BLUETOOTH DEVICE
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
2
Select Remove device.
3
Select Delete.
4
Remove the Bluetooth device.
RED
1
Select BLUETOOTH.
When 12 devices are registered, you cannot register any more devices, and the external device will no
longer be able to pair up with the TV. In this case, you should delete one (disconnect first if a device is
connected to the TV) and then you can register another device.
"Remove device" will be available when selecting the device that is not connected to the TV.
My Info
Remove device
Exit
Bluetooth
Bluetooth off
OK
Move
Search headset
DR-BT140Q PLT 510 sgh-e760 No device
1/1
Exit
Bluetooth
OK
Move
PLT 510
00:19:7f:ff:4a:1a
Do you want to delete the selected Bluetooth
device?
My Info
Bluetooth off
CancelDelete
Search headset
background
70
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
This function provides the My Bluetooth Information to the user.
"Edit" will be available when TV is not connected with any device.
You can edit the Setup TV PIN or Setup TV name.
You can check the TV address.
To accept connection from an external Bluetooth device or to connect to an external Bluetooth device,
the PIN needs to be entered.
For details on how to set the PIN of the external Bluetooth device, refer to the user manual of the
applicable device.
The TV PIN is composed of numbers of up to 16 digits.
The TV PIN must have more than 1 digit.
MY BLUETOOTH INFORMATION
• Press the DELETE button to delete digits
one by one.
•
Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
2
Select My Info.
3
Select Setup TV PIN or Setup TV name.
4
You can use an the alphabet A to Z,
the number 0 to 9, +/ -, and blank.
5
Save.
BLUE
1
Select BLUETOOTH.
My Info
Remove device
Exit
Bluetooth
Bluetooth off
OK
Move
Search headset
DR-BT140Q PLT 510 sgh-e760 No device
1/1
My Info
Remove device
Exit
Bluetooth
Bluetooth off
OK
Move
Search headset
DR-BT140Q PLT 510 sgh-e760 No device
1/1
Close
My Info
Setup TV PIN. 0000
Setup TV name. GLOBAL-PLAT2
TV address 00:05:c9:51:06:f3
background
71
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
RECEIVING PHOTOS FROM EXTERNAL BLUETOOTH
DEVICE
For details on how to send photos(only JPEG) from the external Bluetooth device to TV, refer to the
user manual of the applicable device.
F
G
1/2
◄ ►
Rotate Hide Exit
Receiving picture(s)
Cancel
Select the desired photos.
: Rotate photos.
■ Rotates the photo 90° clockwise upon OK button on .
• The maximum accumulated size of the image(s) that can be received is 10MBytes.
• You cannot receive the image(s) while using the Bluetooth headset.
• You cannot receive the image(s) while listening to music from Bluetooth device.
• When the external Bluetooth device is currently sending the photo, press the BACK button to stop
receiving the photo. All photos already received will be deleted as a result.
• With some Bluetooth devices, you may not be able to transmit an image (JPEG) file to the TV set.
Rotate
Rotate
• When you select Hide with the
ꕌꕍ
< >
button, the OSD will disap-
pear.
And when you press the OK
button again, it will appear
again.
LISTENING TO THE MUSICS FROM EXTERNAL
BLUETOOTH DEVICE
For details on how to listen to the musics from the external Bluetooth device to TV, refer to the user
manual of the applicable device.
You should use the Bluetooth device supporting A2DP(as external device).
• Press the + or - button to adjust the volume.
• If you wish to switch the sound off, press the MUTE button.
• Press the BACK button to return to normal TV viewing.
• With some Bluetooth devices, you may not be able to listen to music via the TV speaker system.
• With some Bluetooth device, the sound can be slow or discontinued from time to time.
NOTE
► You cannot listen to music while using the Bluetooth headset.
► You cannot listen to music while receiving image(s).
Listening to bluetooth music...
Press any key to finish.
background
7272
3D IMAGING
3D IMAGING
(Only 42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***)
This TV can display in 3D via 3D broadcasting or when the TV is connected to a compatible device, such as
a Blu-ray 3D Player. You need such a device to watch the TV in 3D. The 3D TV displays two separate pictures
formatted for each eye. The viewer needs to wear 3D glasses in order to see these images in 3D format.
3D TECHNOLOGY
Viewing 3D Imaging
WARNING
►When viewing 3D images, it is important to watch
the TV from an effective viewing angle and within
the appropriate distance. The appropriate angle is
120°(when the viewing distance is 2m (6.5 ft)) and
distance is 2m – 7m (6.5ft – 22.9ft). If you exceed
this viewing angle or distance, you may not be
able to view the 3D imaging. Further 3D images
may not be displayed if they are viewed whilst you
are lying down.
►If you watch the 3D images too closely or for a
long period of time, it may harm your eyesight. If
you feel any sort of eyestrain stop viewing the 3D
images remove the 3D glasses and rest.
►Watching the TV or playing video games that incor-
porate 3D images with the 3D glasses for a long
period of time can cause drowsiness, headaches
or fatigue to you and/or your eyes. If you experi-
ence any of these symptoms stop viewing the 3D
TV remove the 3D glasses and rest.
►Pregnant woman, seniors, persons with heart
problems or persons who experience frequent
drowsiness should refrain from watching 3D TV.
►
Do not use the 3D imaging or 3D glasses whilst walking
or moving around. Using the 3D imaging and glasses
while moving around may result in injuries due to run-
ning into objects, tripping and/or falling.
►
Some 3D imaging may cause you to duck or dodge
the image displayed in the video. Therefore, it is
best if you do not watch 3D TV near fragile objects
or near any objects that can be knocked over easily.
►
Please prevent children under the age of 5 from watching
3D TV. It may affect their vision development.
►Warning for photosensitization seizure:
Some viewers may experience a seizure or epi-
lepsy when exposed to certain factors, including
ashing lights or image as in TV or video games.
If you or anybody from your family has a history of
epilepsy or seizure, please consult with your doc-
tor before watching 3D TV.
If you experience any dizziness or light headed-
ness, visual transition or altered vision, visual or fa-
cial instability, such as eye or muscle twitching, un-
conscious action, convulsion, loss of conscience,
confusion or disorientation, loss of directional
sense, cramps, or nausea immediately stop watch-
ing the 3D imaging and consult a doctor. Parents
should monitor their children, including teenagers,
for these symptoms as they may be more sensitive
to the effects of watching 3D TV.
Risk of photosensitization seizure can be reduced
with the following actions.
- Take frequent breaks from watching 3D TV.
- For those who have vision that is different in
each eye, they should watch the TV after taking
vision correction measures.
- Watch the TV so that your eyes are on the same
level as the 3D screen and refrain from sitting too
closely to the TV
- Do not watch the 3D imaging when tired or sick,
and avoid watching the 3D imaging for a long pe-
riod of time.
- Do not wear the 3D glasses for any other pur-
pose than viewing 3D imaging on a 3D TV.
- Some viewers may feel disoriented after watch-
ing 3D TV. Therefore, after you watch 3D TV,
take a moment to regain awareness of your situ-
ation before moving.
►To watch the TV in 3D, you must put on your 3D
glasses. For best results, you should wear LG
Brand 3D glasses. The 3D imaging may not dis-
play properly when using another brand of 3D
glasses. Please see the 3D glasses manual for
instructions on how to use the 3D glasses.
►After powering on the TV, a few seconds may be
needed for your TV to calibrate.
► It may take a moment for you to see the 3D imag-
ing if you look away from the TV and then revert
your eyes back to the 3D program.
►The TV may icker slightly if the 3D imaging is dis-
played under 3 wavelength lamp uorescent light
(50 Hz - 60 Hz) or magnetic uorescent lamp (50
Hz - 60 Hz). In such instances, it is recommended
to turn the lights off.
►If there is an obstacle between the TV and the 3D
glasses, the 3D imaging may not display properly.
►Do not use the TV in close proximity to other elec-
tronic equipment and IR equipment.
►In Analog TV, 3D Imaging does not work.
NOTE
background
7373
3D IMAGING
WHEN USING 3D GLASSES
3D IMAGING VIEWING RANGE
►3D glasses are sold separately. Refer to the 3D glasses manual for operating instructions.
►Do not use the 3D glasses to replace your corrective glasses, sunglasses or protective goggles.
►Do not store the 3D glasses in hot or cold locations.
►Do not drop objects onto the 3D glasses. Do not drop or bend the glasses.
►Since the lenses of the 3D glasses are easily scratched, make sure to clean only with a soft cloth.
Shake off any dust before using the cloth since the glasses are easily scratched.
Viewing
Distance
2 m - 7 m
Viewing
Angle
120 º
(When the viewing distance is 2 m)
TV size, viewing angle & other circumstances may change the viewing distance and the angle of view.
60
◦
60
◦
TV
2 m
2 m
7 m
background
74
3D IMAGING
74
3D IMAGING
WATCHING 3D IMAGING
1
Play the video produced in 3D.
Refer to the following for the supported imaging.
After selecting the shape as shown in the screen
on TV, wear the 3D glasses.
For 3D video feed that is input in the HDMI (V. 1.4 with 3D) Frame Packing format, it is automatically
switched to 3D.
Media contents and a player need to support HDMI (V. 1.4 with 3D) Frame Packing to play in 3D.
Video, which is input as HDMI (V. 1.4 with 3D) Frame Packing format, is switched into the 3D screen
automatically.
2
3D
To turn on 3D Mode, select this icon.
Exit
Top & Bottom
Side by Side
Checker Board
Frame
Sequential
Move
OK
►
►
Signal Resolution
Horizontal
Frequency
(kHz)
Vertical
Frequency
(Hz)
Playable 3D video format
HDMI
Input
720p 1280x720
45 60 Top & Bottom, Side by Side
89.9/90 59.94/60
HDMI (V. 1.4 with 3D)
Frame Packing
37.5
50
Top & Bottom, Side by Side
75
HDMI (V. 1.4 with 3D)
Frame Packing
1080i 1920X1080
33.75 60
Top & Bottom, Side by Side
28.125 50
1080p 1920X1080
67.50 60
Top & Bottom, Side by Side,
Checker Board,
Single Frame Sequential
56.250 50 Top & Bottom, Side by Side
27 24
Top & Bottom, Side by Side,
Checker Board
53.95/54 23.98/24
HDMI (V. 1.4 with 3D)
Frame Packing
33.75 30
Top & Bottom, Side by Side,
Checker Board
USB
Input
1080p 1920X1080 33.75 30
Top & Bottom, Side by Side,
Checker Board, MPO(Photo)
Signal Playable 3D video format
DTV
720p, 1080i Top & Bottom, Side by Side
background
7575
3D IMAGING
L/R SELECT
• Press the 3D button to return to normal TV viewing.
3
Select Setting Left/Right.
or
4
Select Left/Right or Right/Left.
Select the screen with 3D video with better visibility.
3D
End 3D video
Exit
Setting Left/Right
Left/Right
Right/Left
OK
3D
End 3D video
Setting Left/Right
Put on 3D glasses.
Sit 2 meters from TV to enjoy the best
3D view.
(To select more comfortable view for
you,
change to left/right image of
glasses with button.)
NOTE
►
If you select 3D mode, "Power indicator" is turned off automatically.
► While watching 3D imaging, you cannot adjust video/audio settings using the menu.
►
Some menus may not work while watching the TV in 3D.
►You can only choose "Standard → Cinema → Game" with the AV MODE button on remote control.
AV Mode is set as Standard while playing in
3D
.
►If used 3D effect on the 2D source, 3D may not work.
►The 3D imaging mode is disabled automatically when switching DTV channels.
►The screen may not be displayed properly if you view 2D DTV images in 3D imaging mode.
►3D effect can be seen when 3D Mode is selected appropriately for the 3D input signal supplied to
the TV.
► Energy Saving is disabled while playing in
3D
.
► For MPO files (3D camera files), the 3D imaging mode is enabled automatically.
►
If you'd like to play the BGM using *.mpo file(3D camera file), In advance, the contents path for BGM should
be set on full-sized photo view screen which isn't *.mpo file(3D camera file).
►
Picture mode is set as Standard, Energy Saving Off if entering to 3D mode.
NOTES FOR VIEWING 3D IMAGE WITH 3D BROADCASTING (
* In Analog TV, 3D Imaging does not work.)
When switching the 2D image display to the
3D image display with the 3D button on the
remote control, the overlapped image may be
displayed.
ꔛ
Disable the 3D imaging mode with the 3D button.
ꔛ
The 3D imaging mode is disabled automatically if
you change the channel.
If the screen is divided into
left/right or top/bottom when
you change the channel
ꔛ
This channel supports the 3D imaging mode.
Select the 3D imaging type displayed on the
screen by pressing the 3D button on the remote
control.
If your eyes are sore or the screen looks blurry
while viewing 3D images
ꔛ
Press the L/R SELECT button on the remote con-
trol and select L/R or R/L, which you find better for
viewing 3D images.
background
76
TO USE A USB DEVICE
5
Search other network device.
BLUE
Please select the device.
USB Label
Search
Previous
USB Label
DLNA
Device Selection
4
Select the desired device.
(Only 32/42/52LD56*,
32/37/42/47/55LD6**,
32/37/42/47/55LE55**,
32/37/42/47/55LE7***,
42/47/55LE8***
, 42/47/55LX6***,
47/55LX9***)
TO USE A USB DEVICE
WHEN CONNECTING A USB DEVICE
It is not possible to use MY MEDIA menu in 22/26/32LD3** models.
It is possible to use DLNA function in 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**, 32/37/42/47/55LE55**,
32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9*** models.
When you connect a USB device, this pop up menu is displayed, automatically.
“POP UP MENU” will not be displayed while the OSD including Menu, EPG or Schedule list is activat-
ed or while the Bluetooth Headset is connected.
When the Pop Up menu appears, you can select Music List, Photo List or Movie List in the MY MEDIA
menu.
In USB device, you can not add a new folder or delete the existing folder.
After choosing the desired type of media, choose a device to open files from. The options are: USB
device or DLNA.
Connect the USB device to the USB IN 1
or USB IN 2 jack on the TV.
1
When removing the USB device
Select the USB Device menu before removing
the USB device.
Select USB Device.
1
Select Eject.
2
3
2
Select Movie List, Photo List or
Music List.
Movie List Music ListPhoto List
MY MEDIA
Exit
Press OK( ) to see photos from the USB.
Option
AV IN2
IN 3
H/P
• Only photo(JPEG, MPO(Only 42/47/55LX6***,
47/55LX9***)), music (MP3) and movie(DAT,
MPG, MPEG, VOB, AVI, DIVX, MP4, MKV, TS,
TRP, TP, ASF, WMV) are supported.
or
• Press the BACK button to
move to the previous menu
screen.
background
77
TO USE A USB DEVICE
Precautions when using the USB device
► Only a USB storage device is recognizable.
► If the USB storage device is connected through a USB hub, the device is not recognizable.
► A USB storage device using an automatic recognition programme may not be recognized.
► A USB storage device which uses its own driver may not be recognized.
► The recognition speed of a USB storage device may depend on each device.
►Please do not turn off the TV or unplug the USB device when the connected USB storage device is working.
When such device is suddenly separated or unplugged, the stored files or the USB storage device may be
damaged.
► Please do not connect the USB storage device which was artificially maneuvered on the PC. The
device may cause the product to malfunction or fail to be played. Never forget to use only a USB stor-
age device which has normal music files, image files or movie files.
► Please use only a USB storage device which was formatted as a FAT32 file system, NTFS file system
provided with the Windows operating system. In case of a storage device formatted as a different utility
programme which is not supported by Windows, it may not be recognized.
► Please connect power to a USB storage device(over 0.5 A) which requires an external power supply. If
not, the device may not be recognized.
► Please connect a USB storage device with the cable offered by the device maker.
► Some USB storage devices may not be supported or operated smoothly.
► File alignment method of USB storage device is similar to Window XP and filename can recognize up to 100
English characters.
► Be sure to back up important files since data stored in a USB memory device may be damaged. We
will not be responsible for any data loss.
►
If the USB HDD does not have an external power source, the USB device may not be detected. So be sure to
connect the external power source. - Please use a power adaptor for an external power source. We do not guar-
antee an USB cable for an external power source.
► If your USB memory device has multiple partitions, or if you use a USB multi-card reader, you can use
up to 4 partitions or USB memory devices.
► If a USB memory device is connected to a USB multi-card reader, its volume data may not be detected.
► If the USB memory device does not work properly, disconnect and reconnect it.
► How fast a USB memory device is detected differs from device to device.
►If the USB is connected in Standby Mode, specific hard disk will automatically be loaded when the TV is
turned on.
► The recommended capacity is 1 TB or less for a USB external hard disk and 32 GB or less for USB
memory.
► Any device with more than the recommended capacity may not work properly.
► If a USB external hard disk with a "Energy Saving" function does not work, turn the hard disk off and on
again to make it work properly.
► USB storage devices below USB 2.0 are supported as well. But they may not work properly in the
movie list.
► Maximum of 999 folders or files can be recognized under one folder.
► The file arrangement of the USB storage device is similar to that of Windows XP and supports up to
100 alphabetical characters.
► If there are a lot of folders or files all within one folder, the device may not be able to access these
properly.
background
78
TO USE A USB DEVICE
TO USE A USB DEVICE
About DLNA
This TV can display and play many types of movie, photo and music files from your DLNA server and
has been certified by DLNA for photos.
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a cross-industry organization of consumer electronics,
computing industry and mobile device companies. Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing
of digital media through a wired or wireless network in the home.
The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find products that comply with the DLNA Interoperability
Guidelines. This unit complies with DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1.5. When a PC running DLNA
server software or other DLNA compatible device is connected to this TV, some setting changes of
software or other devices may be required. Please refer to the operating instructions for the software
or device for more information.
Please refer to pages 79 ~ 107 for additional information on supported file types and other instructions.
DLNA
NOTE
►The supplied Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials CD-ROM is a customized software edition only for
sharing files and folders to this TV.
►The supplied Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials software does not support following functions:
Transcoding, Remote UI, TV control, Internet services and Apple iTunes
►This manual explains operations with the English version of Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials as
examples. Follow the explanation referring to the actual operations of your language version.
► If there are a lot of folders or files all within one folder, the device may not be able to access these
properly.
►
For the DLNA option, use the Nero MediaHome programme that is provided with the TV. However, we
cannot guarantee that third party programmes will work perfectly.
►
You can select a channel while viewing the small preview channel list on your TV screen.
►Check your network settings when the DLNA option does not work properly.
►If there is an abnormal operation or an error occurs in Nero Media Home, the DLNA option may
not work properly. In this case, exit Nero Media Home and restart the programme. You can down-
load the latest version of Nero Media Home by clicking the question mark at the bottom-left of the
programme.
►When the network is unstable, the device may be slower or may need to load during playback.
►When playing a video in DLNA mode, the Multi Audio and Closed Caption features are not supported.
►When selecting Full Screen in DLNA mode, the ratio of the outputted screen may differ from the
original.
►When more than one TV is connected to a single server in DLNA mode, a file may not play properly,
depending on the server performance.
►If the play time information is not provided by the server, it is displayed as "--:--:--."
►When using Movie List, DRM /*.tp /*.trp files in the DLNA server cannot be played.
►
DLNA operation may not work properly according to the AP manufacturers.
background
79
TO USE A USB DEVICE
Installing Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials
Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials is easy to use DLNA server software for Windows.
Requirement PC system before you install Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials
■ Windows® XP (Service Pack 2 or higher), Windows Vista® (no Service Pack required),
Windows® XP Media Center Edition 2005 (Service Pack 2 or higher), Windows Server® 2003
■ Windows Vista® 64-bit edition (application runs in 32-bit mode)
■ Hard drive space: 200 MB hard drive space for a typical installation of Nero MediaHome stand-
alone
■ 1.2 GHz Intel® Pentium® III or AMD Sempron™ 2200+ processors
■ Memory: 256 MB RAM
■ Graphics card with at least 32 MB video memory, minimum resolution of 800 x 600 pixels, and
16-bit color settings
■ Windows® Internet Explorer® 6.0 or higher
■ DirectX® 9.0c revision 30 (August 2006) or higher
■ Network environment: 100 Mb Ethernet, WLAN (IEEE 802.11 b/g/n) (IEEE 802.11 n: Except for
Russia)
1
Start up your computer, and insert the Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials CD-ROM into your compu-
ter’s CD-ROM drive.
An installation wizard will walk you through the quick and uncomplicated installation process.
2
Close all Microsoft Windows programmes and exit any anti-virus software that may be running.
3
Insert the Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials CD-ROM into your computer’s CD-ROM drive.
4
Click Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials. The installation is prepared and the installation wizard
appears.
5
Click the Next button to display the serial number input screen.
Click Next to go to the next step.
6
If you accept all conditions, click I accept the License Conditions check box and click Next.
Installation is not possible without this agreement.
7
Click Typical and click Next. The installation process is started.
8
If you want to take part in the anonymous collection of data, select the check box and click the Next
button.
9
Click the Exit button to complete the installation.
background
80
TO USE A USB DEVICE
TO USE A USB DEVICE
Sharing files and folders
After installing Nero MediaHome, you must add folders you wish to share.
1
Double-click the Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials icon on the desktop.
2
Click Network icon on the left and define your network name in the Network name field. The
Network name you enter will be recognized by your TV.
3
Click Shares icon on the left.
4
Click Local Folders tab on the Shared screen.
5
Click Add icon to open the Browse Folder window.
6
Select the folder containing the files you want to share. The selected folder is added to the list of
shared folders.
7
Click Start Server icon to start the server.
NOTE
►If the shared folders or files are not displayed on the TV, click the folder on the Local Folders
tab and click Rescan Folder at the More button.
►Visit www.nero.com for more information and software tools.
background
81
TO USE A USB DEVICE
Playing back shared contents
You can display and play movie, photo and music content stored on your computer or other DLNA
media servers.
1
Start the server on your computer or other device that connected on your home network.
NOTE
►To play the file on the media server, the TV and the media server must be connected to the same
access point.
►Because the compatibility and available playback functions on the MY MEDIA menu are tested
on the bundle DLNA server (Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials) environment, file requirements and
playback functions on the MY MEDIA may differ depending on media servers.
►The file requirements on this page are not always compatible. There may have some restrictions
by file features and media server’s ability.
► Even the files that are not supported can be displayed in photo thumbnail or music thumbnail.
►Movie thumbnail is not supported in DLNA Movie.
►If there is an unplayable music file in the MY MEDIA menu, the TV will skip the file and play next
file.
►The file information indicated on the screen may not always correct for music and movie files in
MY MEDIA menu
►This TV only supports movie subtitle files supplied by Nero MediaHome 4.
►The subtitle file name and movie file name have to be the same and located at the same folder.
►If subtitle files have been added after a directory has been indexed already, the user has to
remove and re-add the folder to the list of shares.
►The playback and operating quality of the MY MEDIA function may be affected by your home net-
work condition.
►The files from removable media such as USB drive, DVD-drive etc. on your media server may not
share properly.
►When playing the Media through DLNA connection, it does not support the DivX file play which is
protected by DRM.
► Up to 200 folders in one folder and 999 including folders and files can be recognized.
► If there are a lot of folders or files all within one folder, the device may not be able to access these
properly.
2
Select MY MEDIA.
3
Select Movie List, Photo List or Music List.
4
Select the DLNA.
Depending on the media server, this TV may need to get the permission from
the server.
If you want to re-scan available media server, press blue colour button.
background
82
TO USE A USB DEVICE
TO USE A USB DEVICE
MOVIE LIST
You can play movie files on a USB storage device.
The movie list is activated once USB is detected. It is used when playing movie files on TV.
Displays the movies in the USB folder and supports Play.
Allows playback of all movies in the folder and user desired files.
It is a movie list that displays folder information and movie file.
The On Screen Display may be different from your TV. Images are an example to assist with the TV
operation.
Movie(*.mpg/*.mpeg/*dat/*.ts/*.trp/*.tp/*.vob/*.mp4/*.mov/*.mkv/*.divx/*.avi/*.asf/*.wmv/*/*.flv/*.
avi(motion-jpeg)/*.mp4(motion-jpeg)/*.mkv(motion-jpeg))supporting file
Video format : DivX3.11, DivX4.12, DivX5.x, DivX6, Xvid1.00, Xvid1.01, Xvid1.02, Xvid1.03,
Xvid1.10 beta-1/beta-2, Mpeg-1, Mpeg-2, Mpeg-4, H.264/AVC, VC1, JPEG, Sorenson
H.263
Audio format : Dolby Digital, Mpeg, MP3, LPCM, ADPCM, WMA
Bit rate : within 32 kbps to 320 kbps(MP3)
External Subtitle format : *.smi/*.srt/*.sub(MicroDVD,Subviewer1.0/2.0)/*.ass/*.ssa/*.txt(TMPlayer)/*.
psb(PowerDivX)
Internal Subtitle format : only, XSUB (It is the subtitle format used in DivX6 files)
• Some user-created subtitles may not work properly.
• Some special characters are not supported in subtitles.
• HTML tags are not supported in subtitles.
• Subtitles in languages other than the supported languages are not available.
• Changing font and colour in subtitles is not supported.
• Subtitles in languages other than one specified are not supported.
• Video files with subtitle files of 1 MB or larger may not be played properly.
• The screen may suffer temporary interruptions (image stoppage, faster playback, etc.) when the
audio language is changed.
• A damaged movie file may not be played correctly, or some player functions may not be usable.
• Movie files produced with some encoders may not be played correctly.
• If the video and audio structure of recorded file is not interleaved, either video or audio is output-
ted.
• HD videos with a maximum of 1920x1080@25/30P or 1280x720@50/60P are supported, depend-
ing on the frame.
• Videos with resolutions higher than 1920X1080@25/30P or 1280x720@50/60P may not work
properly depending on the frame.
• Movie files other than the specified types and formats may not work properly.
• Max bitrate of playable movie file is 20 Mbps. (only, Motion JPEG : 10 Mbps (Except for
32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**, 32/37/42/47/55LE55**, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***,
42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***))
• We do not guarantee smooth playback of profiles encoded level 4.1 or higher in H.264/AVC.
• DTS Audio codec is not supported.
• A movie file more than 30 GB in file size is not supported for playback.
• A DivX movie file and its subtitle file must be located in the same folder.
• A video file name and its subtitle file name must be identical for it to be displayed.
• Playing a video via a USB connection that doesn’t support high speed may not work properly.
• The movie file encoded by the GMC (Global Motion Compensation) and Qpel (Quarterpel Motion
Estimation) is not supported.
• When you are watching the movie by Movie List function, you can adjust an image by Energy
Saving and AV Mode key on the remote control. User setup for each image mode does not oper-
ate.
• Trick Mode does not support other functions than ►► if video files do not have index information.
• When playing video file using network, the Trick mode is limited to 2-times speed.
• Video file names that contain special characters may not be playable.
background
83
TO USE A USB DEVICE
.mkv
Video
Audio
H.264 / AVC
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
MP3
Dolby Digital
.ts
.trp
.tp
Video
Audio
H.264 / AVC
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
MPEG-2
Main Profile@High Level(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60)
VC-1
Simple Profile@Medium Level
(e.g. CIF, QVGA)
Main Profile@High Level
(e.g. 1080p30)
Advanced Profile@Level3
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
MPEG-1Layer I, II
MPEG-1 Layer III(MP3)
Dolby Digital
MP3
.vob
Video
Audio
MPEG-1
MPEG-2
Main Profile@High Level (e.g. 720p60, 1080i60)
Dolby Digital
MPEG-1Layer I, II
DVD-LPCM
.mpg
Video
Audio
MPEG-1
MPEG-1Layer I, II
Main Profile@High Level
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60)
Most of the MKV
content available is
encoded by the open
source x264 codec.
Only streams com-
pliant to SMPTE
421M VC-1 stand-
ard are supported.
Only streams compliant
configured properly for
TS, PS or ES
Supported DivX file
(Only 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**, 32/37/42/47/55LE55**, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***,
42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***)
.divx
.avi
Video
Audio
DivX3.11
DivX4
DivX5
DivX6
Advanced Simple Profile
(e.g. 720p/1080i)
XViD
H.264 / AVC
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
MPEG-1Layer I, II
MPEG-1 Layer III(MP3)
Dolby Digital
.mp4
.m4v
Video
Audio
H.264 / AVC
MPEG-4 Part 2
MP3
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
Advanced Simple Profile (e.g.
720p/1080i)
Global motion com-
pensation or quar-
terpel motion esti-
mation does not
supported. Streams
using this syntax are
not supported.
Global motion
compensation or
quarterpel motion
estimation does
not supported.
Streams using this
syntax are not sup-
ported.
.asf
.wmv
Advanced Profile@Level 3
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
VC-1 Advanced Profile
VC-1 Simple and Main
Profiles
File Extensions
A/V
Explanation
Profile/Level Support
Codec
Video
Only streams compliant
to SMPTE 421M VC-1
standard are supported.
Audio
WMA Standard
Simple Profile@Medium Level (e.g. CIF, QVGA)
Main Profile@High Level (e.g. 1080p30)
WMA 9 Professional
background
84
TO USE A USB DEVICE
TO USE A USB DEVICE
File
Extension name
Video Decoder Audio Codec Max Resolution
mpg, mpeg MPEG1, 2 MP2, MP3, Dolby Digital, LPCM
1920x1080@30p
(only, Motion JPEG
640x480@30p)
dat MPEG1 MP2
ts, trp, tp MPEG2, H.264/AVC, VC1
MP2, MP3, Dolby Digital
vob MPEG1, 2 MP2, MP3, Dolby Digital, LPCM
mp4, mov
MPEG4, DivX 3.11, DivX 4.12, DivX 5.x,
DivX 6, Xvid 1.00, Xvid 1.01, Xvid 1.02,
Xvid 1.03, Xvid 1.10-beta1/2, H.264/AVC
MP3
mkv H.264/AVC, MPEG-1,2,4
MP2, MP3, Dolby Digital,
LPCM
divx, avi
MPEG2, MPEG4, DivX 3.11, DivX 4.DivX
5, DivX 6, Xvid 1.00, Xvid 1.01, Xvid
1.02, Xvid 1.03, Xvid 1.10-beta1/2b
H.264/AVC
MP2, MP3, Dolby Digital,
LPCM, ADPCM
Motion JPEG
(avi, mp4, mkv)
JPEG LPCM, ADPCM
asf, wmv VC1 WMA
flv Sorenson H.263, H264
MP3
Supported DivX file
(Except for 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**, 32/37/42/47/55LE55**, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***,
42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***)
background
85
TO USE A USB DEVICE
Screen Components
Moves to upper level folder
Current page/Total pages
Corresponding buttons on the
remote control
Contents under the folder
focused on
1
Current page/ total pages of
contents under the folder
focused on
1
1
3
4
5
2
Select Movie List.
2
Select MY MEDIA.
1
Page 1/1
Movie List
USB1 External
Drive1
Page 1/1
To Photo List
Change Device
Change Numbers
Mark Mode
Exit
Mark
MARK
Play Page Change
Move
P
003
001 002
004
005 006
2
1
3
4
5
You can also adjust USB in the INPUT menu.
Only 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**,
32/37/42/47/55LE55**, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***,
42/47/55LE8***,
42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***
• Some files may be displayed
the preview image by icon
only.
• Non-supported files are
displayed the preview
image by icon only.
• Abnormal files are
displayed in the
form of bitmap.
background
86
TO USE A USB DEVICE
TO USE A USB DEVICE
Movie Selection
■ When playing movie files
• Use the P
button to navigation in the
movie page.
1
Select the target folder or drive.
2
Select the desired movie title.
3
Movie files are played.
Page 1/1
Movie List
Drive1
Page 1/1
003
001 002
004
005 006
USB1 External
Mark
MARK
Play Page Change
Move
P
RED
Change device. (Only 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**, 32/37/42/47/55LE55**,
32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***,
42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***)
GREEN
Repeatedly, press the GREEN button to converted to Photo List->Music List.
YELLOW
A method to view in 5 large thumbnail or simple list.
BLUE
Convert to Mark Mode.
EXIT
Return to normal TV viewing.
► Press the PLAY
(
►
)
button to return to normal playback.
Using the remote control
051. Apple_ ......
02:30:25
To Photo List
Change Device
Change Numbers
Mark Mode
Exit
background
87
TO USE A USB DEVICE
■ When selected movie files are played
• When one or more movie files are
marked, the marked movies will
be played in sequence.
Page 1/1
Movie List
Drive1
Page 1/1
003
001 002
004
005 006
USB1 External
Mark
MARK
Mark Page Change
Move
P
Exit Mark Mode
Unmark All
Mark All
Play Marked
Exit
051. Apple_ ......
02:30:25
Mark Mode
1
Select the target folder or drive.
2
Select the desired movie title.
3
or
BLUE
Convert to Mark Mode.
4
Mark desired Movie file.
5
Marked movie file is played.
RED
background
88
TO USE A USB DEVICE
TO USE A USB DEVICE
NOTE
►If you select “Yes” from OSD when playing the same file after the movie file has been stopped, it
will restart where it stopped previously.
►If continuous series files exist within the folder, the next file will automatically be played.
But, this excludes cases when the Repeat function of Movie List Option is turned “On” (Refer to
p. 91) or when set as Marked Play.
►In the case where files are not validated, a message will appear regarding invalid file.
RED
Play the selected movie file.
Once a movie file finishes playing, the next selected one will be played automatically.
GREEN
Mark all movie files on the screen.
YELLOW
Deselect all marked movie files.
BLUE
Exit the Mark Mode.
EXIT
Return to normal TV viewing.
Using the remote control
background
89
TO USE A USB DEVICE
►
01:02:30 / 02:30:25
◄►
Set Video Play.
Set Video.
Set Audio.
Close
Using the Movie List function, play
NOTE
► Option values changed in Movie List does not affect Photo List and Music List.
► Option value changed in Photo List and Music List are changed likewise in Photo List and Music List
excluding Movie List.
► When replaying the video file after stopping, you can play from where it stopped previously.
1
or
Show the Option menu.
2
Select Set Video Play., Set Video. or Set Audio.
or Set 3D video(Only 42/47/55LX6***,
47/55LX9***).
Option
Hide
Q.MENU
■ ► II ◄◄ ►►
Exit
Choose options.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
background
90
TO USE A USB DEVICE
TO USE A USB DEVICE
■ Stop the playing movie file.
► Press the PLAY
(
►
)
button to return to normal playback.
II
During playback, press the Pause
(
II
)
button.
■ Still screen is displayed.
■ If no buttons are pressed on the remote control for 10 minutes after pausing, the
TV returns to the playback state.
■ Press the Pause
(
II
)
button and then use the FF(►►) button for slow motion.
◄◄ / ►►
When playing,
repeatedly, press the REW
(
◄◄
)
button to speed up ◄◄(x2) -> ◄◄◄(x4) ->
◄◄◄◄(x8) ->◄◄◄◄◄(x16) ->◄◄◄◄◄◄(x32) .
repeatedly, press the FF
(
►►
)
button to speed up ►►(x2)-> ►►►(x4) ->
►►►►(x8) ->►►►►►(x16) -> ►►►►►►(x32).
■ Pressing these buttons repeatedly increases the fast forward/reverse speed.
or
MENU
Q.MENU
Show the Option menu.
BACK
Hide the menu on the full-sized screen.
■ To see the menu again on the full-sized screen, press OK button to display.
EXIT
Return to normal TV viewing.
< >
■ When using the
<
or
>
button during playback a cursor indicating the position can
be viewed on the screen.
Press the ENERGY SAVING button repeatedly to change the brightness of your
screen.(Refer to p. 119)
Press the AV MODE button repeatedly to select the desired source.(Refer to p. 55)
Using the remote control
background
91
TO USE A USB DEVICE
■ When you select the Set Video Play,
Set Video Play.
Picture Size
Audio Language
1
◄ ►
On
◄ ►
Subtitle Language
0
● Position
◄ ►
Normal
● Size
◄ ►
0
● Sync
◄ ►
English
● Language
◄ ►
Default
● Code page
◄ ►
On
Repeat
◄ ►
Full
◄ ►
Previous
1
Select Picture Size, Audio
Language, Subtitle Language
or Repeat.
2
Make appropriate adjustments.
Subtitle Language Support Language
Latin1
English, French, Spanish, Portuguese, Malaysia,
Indonesia
Cyrillic
Russian
Thai
Thai
Hebrew
Hebrew
Arabic
Arab, Parsi, Krudish
Unicode(UTF-16)
Vietnamese language
►Picture Size : Selects your desired picture
format during movie play.
►Audio Language : Changes the Language
Group of the audio during movie play. Files
with a single audio track cannot be select-
ed.
►Subtitle Language : Turn on/off the subti-
tle.
►Language : Activated for SMI subtitle and
can select the language within the subtitle.
►Code page : Can select the font for subti-
tle. When set to default, same font as gen-
eral menu will be used.
►Sync : Adjusts the time synchronisation of
the subtitle from -10 secs to +10 secs by
steps of 0.5 secs during movie play.
►Position : Changes the position of the
subtitle either up or down during movie
play.
►Size : Selects your desired Subtitle size
during movie play.
►Repeat : Turn on/off repeat function of
movie playback. When turned on, the file
within the folder will be played back
repeatedly. Even when the repeated play-
back is turned off, it can run the playback if
the file name is similar to the previous file.
NOTE
► Only 10,000 of sync blocks can be supported within the subtitle file.
► When playing a video, you can adjust the Picture Size by pressing the RATIO button.
background
92
TO USE A USB DEVICE
TO USE A USB DEVICE
■ When you select the Set Video,
1
Select Picture Mode or TruMotion.
2
Make appropriate adjustments. (Refer to p. 120 to 129)
Set Video.
Picture Mode
● Dynamic Contrast
Previous
● Backlight 70
● Brightness 50
● Colour 60
● Contrast 100
◄ ►
◄ ►
Standard
◄ ►
Medium
◄ ►
● Edge Enhancer
High
◄ ►
● Noise Reduction
Medium
◄
►
TruMotion
Low
◄ ►
◄ ►
◄
Picture Reset
■ When you select the Set Audio,
1
Select Sound Mode, Auto
Volume, Clear Voice II or
Balance.
2
Make appropriate adjustments. (Refer
to p. 133 to 137 )
Set Audio.
Standard
Sound Mode
◄ ►
Off
Auto Volume
◄ ►
Off
Clear Voice II
Balance 0
◄
►
Previous
L R
◄ ►
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
■ When you select the Set 3D video,
(Only 42/47/55LX6
***,
47/55LX9
***
)
OK
3D
End 3D video
Setting Left/Right
Put on 3D glasses.
Sit 2 meters from TV to enjoy the best
3D view.
(To select more comfortable view for
you,
change to left/right image of
glasses with button.)
For more information, see the 3D Imaging sec-
tion in the Owner's Manual.
background
93
TO USE A USB DEVICE
Screen Components
You can view photo files on USB storage device.
The On Screen Display may be different from your TV. Images are an example to assist with the TV operation.
When you are watching the photo by the Photo List function, you can not change the picture mode.
PHOTO LIST
PHOTO(*.JPEG) supporting file
Baseline : 64 x 64 to 15360 x 8640
Progressive : 64 x 64 to 1920 x 1440
• You can play JPEG files only.
• Non-supported files are displayed in the form of predefined icon.
• An error message occurs for corrupted files or file formats that cannot be played.
• Corrupted image files may not be displayed properly.
• It may take some time to view high-resolution images in full screen.
You can also adjust USB in the INPUT menu.
Moves to upper level folder
Current page/Total pages
Corresponding buttons on the
remote control
Contents under the folder
focused on
1
Current page/ total pages of
contents under the folder
focused on
1
1
3
2
Select MY MEDIA.
Select Photo List.
2
1
Page 1/1
Photo List
Drive1
P01
P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15
P02 P03 P04 P05 P06 P07
P08
P09
Page 1/1
2
1
3
4
5
4
5
USB1 External
Mark
MARK
View Page Change
Move
P
To Music List
Change Device
Change Numbers
Mark Mode
Exit
Only 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**,
32/37/42/47/55LE55**, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***,
42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***
Only 42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***
File
Extensions
Item Profile
2D
jpeg
jpg
jpe
supproted file format
SOF0: baseline
SOF1: Extend Sequential
SOF2: Progressive
photo size
Min: 64 x 64
Max - Normal Type: 15360 (W) x 8640 (H)
Progressive Type: 1920 (W) x 1440 (H)
3D
mpo
supproted file format mpo
photo size
4:3 size: 3,648 x 2,736
2,592 x 1,944
2,048 x 1,536
3:2 size: 3,648 x 2,432
background
94
TO USE A USB DEVICE
TO USE A USB DEVICE
RED
Change device. (Only 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**, 32/37/42/47/55LE55**,
32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***,
42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***)
GREEN
Repeatedly, press the GREEN button to converted to Music List->Movie List.
YELLOW
A method to view in 5 large thumbnail or simple list.
BLUE
Convert to Mark Mode.
EXIT
Return to normal TV viewing.
Using the remote control
Photo Selection
■ When playing photo files
1
Select the target folder or drive.
2
Select the desired photos.
3
Photo files are displayed.
• Use the P
button to navigation in the
photo page.
Page 1/1
Photo List
Drive1
P01
P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15
P02 P0
3
P04 P05 P0
6
P07
P08
P09
Page 1/1
USB1 External
Mark
MARK
View Page Change
Move
P
To Music List
Change Device
Change Numbers
Mark Mode
Exit
background
95
TO USE A USB DEVICE
■ When selected photo files are displayed
• When one or more photos are marked, you
can view each marked photo or a slide show
of the marked photos. If no photos are
marked, you can view every individual photo
in the folder or a slide show of all photos in
the folder.
Page 1/1
Photo List
Drive1
P01
P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15
P02 P0
3
P04 P05 P06 P07
P08
P09
Page 1/1
USB1 External
Mark
MARK
Mark Page Change
Move
P
Exit Mark Mode
Unmark All
Mark All
View Marked
Exit
Mark Mode
1
Select the target folder or drive.
2
Select the desired photos.
3
or
BLUE
Convert to Mark Mode.
4
Mark desired photo file.
5
Marked photo file is displayed.
RED
RED
Display the selected photo file.
GREEN
Mark all photo files on the screen.
YELLOW
Deselect all marked photo files.
BLUE
Exit the Mark Mode.
EXIT
Return to normal TV viewing.
Using the remote control
background
96
TO USE A USB DEVICE
TO USE A USB DEVICE
How to view photo
◄ ►
Detailed operations are available on full-sized photo view screen.
• Use the P button to navigation in the
photo page.
1
Select the target folder or drive.
2
Select the desired photos.
3
The selected photo is displayed in full
size.
The aspect ratio of a photo may change the size
of the photo displayed on the screen in full size.
Press the EXIT button to move to the previous
menu screen.
• Press the EXIT button to go back to Photo List.
• Press the BACK button to make Help OSD disappear.
01_a.jpg
2008/12/10
1920 x 1080
479 KB
Page 1/1
Photo List
Drive1
P01
P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15
P02 P0
3
P04 P05 P0
6
P07
P08
P09
Page 1/1
USB1 External
Mark
MARK
View Page Change
Move
P
2/13
◄ ►
Slideshow
►
BGM
■
Hide
Option
Q.MENU
Exit
or
2/13
◄ ►
Slideshow
►
BGM
■
Hide
Option
Q.MENU
Exit
(Only 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**,
32/37/42/47/55LE55
*
*, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***,
42/47/55LE8***,
42/47/55LX6***,
47/55LX9***)
(Except for 32/42/52LD56*,
32/37/42/47/55LD6**, 32/37/42/47/55LE55
*
*,
32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***
,
42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***)
To Music List
Change Device
Change Numbers
Mark Mode
Exit
background
97
TO USE A USB DEVICE
• Use
button to select the previous
or next photo.
• Use
button to select and control
the menu on the full-sized screen.
4
Select the
Slideshow,
BGM, � (Rotate),
/ (or ),
, Option, Hide or
Exit.
► Slideshow : When no picture is selected, all photos in the current folder are dis-
played during slide show. If some photos are selected, those photos are displayed
in a slide show.
■ Set the time interval of the slide show in Option.
► BGM (Background Music) : Listen to music while viewing photos in full size.
■ Set the BGM device and album in Options before using this function.
■ You can adjust Option by Q.MENU or MENU button on the remote control.
► � (Rotate)
: Rotate photos.
■ Rotates the photo 90°, 180°, 270°, 360° clockwise.
■ It can not be rotate when the width of a picture is bigger than supported
height.
►
(
ZOOM IN
): View the photo by zoom in 2, 4 times.
► /
: View the photo in full mode or original mode.
► :
Press the ENERGY SAVING button repeatedly to change the bright-
ness of your screen.(Refer to p. 119)
► Option :
Set values for Slide Speed and BGM.
■ Use button and OK button to set values. Press OK to save the
settings.
■ You cannot change
BGM
while BGM is playing.
■ You can only select the MP3 folder saved on the device that currently dis-
plays the photo.
► Hide :
Hide the menu on the full-sized screen.
■ To see the menu again on the full-sized screen, press OK button to dis-
play.
Press the EXIT button to go back to Photo List.
2/13
◄ ►
◄ ►
01_a.jpg
2008/12/10
1920 x 1080
479 KB
Slideshow
►
BGM
■
Hide
Option
Q.MENU
Exit
background
98
TO USE A USB DEVICE
TO USE A USB DEVICE
2/13
◄ ►
◄ ►
Set Photo View.
Set Video.
Set Audio.
Close
Using the Photo List function
NOTE
► Option values changed in Movie List does not affect Photo List and Music List.
► Option value changed in Photo List and Music List are changed likewise in Photo List and Music List
excluding Movie List.
1
or
Show the Option menu.
2
Select Set Photo View., Set Video. or Set Audio. or Set 3D video(Only 42/47/55LX6***,
47/55LX9***).
Slideshow
►
BGM
■
Hide
Option
Q.MENU
Exit
01_a.jpg
2008/12/10
1920 x 1080
479 KB
■ When you select the Set Photo View,
Drive1
Previous
Set Photo View.
BGM
Fast
Slide Speed
◄ ►
On
● Repeat
◄ ►
Off
● Random
◄ ►
1
Select Slide Speed or BGM.
2
Make appropriate adjustments.
Choose options.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
background
99
TO USE A USB DEVICE
■ When you select the Set video,
1
Select Picture Mode or TruMotion.
2
Make appropriate adjustments. (Refer to p. 120 to 129)
Set Video.
Picture Mode
● Dynamic Contrast
Previous
● Backlight 70
● Brightness 50
● Colour 60
● Contrast 100
◄ ►
◄ ►
Standard
◄ ►
Medium
◄
►
● Edge Enhancer
High
◄ ►
● Noise Reduction
Medium
◄ ►
TruMotion
Off
◄ ►
◄ ►
◄
Picture Reset
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
■ When you select the Set Audio,
1
Select Sound Mode, Auto
Volume, Clear Voice II or
Balance.
2
Make appropriate adjustments. (Refer
to p. 133 to 137)
Set Audio.
Standard
Sound Mode
◄ ►
Off
Auto Volume
◄ ►
Off
Clear Voice II
Balance 0
◄ ►
Previous
L R
◄ ►
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
■ When you select the Set 3D video,
(Only 42/47/55LX6
***,
47/55LX9
***
)
For more information, see the 3D Imaging section
in the Owner's Manual.
OK
3D
End 3D video
Setting Left/Right
Put on 3D glasses.
Sit 2 meters from TV to enjoy the best
3D view.
(To select more comfortable view for
you,
change to left/right image of
glasses with button.)
background
100
TO USE A USB DEVICE
TO USE A USB DEVICE
MUSIC LIST
You can play music files on USB storage device.
Purchased music files(*.MP3) may contain copyright restrictions. Playback of these files may not be
supported by this model.
Music file on your USB device can be played by this unit.
The On Screen Display may be different from your TV. Images are an example to assist with the TV
operation.
MUSIC (*.MP3) supporting file
Bit rate 32 to 320
• Sampling rate MPEG1 Layer3 : 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
• Sampling rate MPEG2 Layer3 : 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz
• Sampling rate MPEG2.5 Layer3 : 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz
Screen Components
Page 1/1
Music List
Drive1
Page 1/1
001. - B01 .mp3
00:00
002. -B02.mp3
00:00
003. B03.mp3
00:00
004. - B04.mp3
00:00
005. - B05.mp3
00:00
Preview: If any album jacket
for the file(Album Art Image)
exists, this jacket is displayed.
Moves to upper level folder
Current page/Total pages
Corresponding buttons on the
remote control
Contents under the folder
focused on
2
Current page/ total pages of
contents under the folder
focused on
2
1
3
2
Select MY MEDIA.
Select Music List.
2
1
3
2
1
4
4
5
6
You can also adjust USB in the INPUT menu.
5
6
USB1 External
Mark
MARK
Play Page Change
Move
P
To Movie List
Change Device
Change Numbers
Mark Mode
Exit
Only 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**,
32/37/42/47/55LE55**, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***,
42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***
Except 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**,
32/37/42/47/55LE55**, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***,
42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***
background
101
TO USE A USB DEVICE
Music Selection
■ When playing music files
1
Select the target folder or drive.
2
Select the desired music title.
3
Music files are played.
• Use the P button to navigate up/down in
the music page.
Page 1/1
Music List
Drive1
Page 1/1
001. - B01.mp3
00:00
002. -B02.mp3
00:00
003. B03.mp3
00:00
004. - B04.mp3
00:00
005. - B05.mp3
00:00
USB1 External
Mark
MARK
Play Page Change
Move
P
RED
Change device. (Only 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**, 32/37/42/47/55LE55**,
32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***)
GREEN
Repeatedly, press the GREEN button to converted to Movie List->Photo List.
YELLOW
A method to view in 5 large thumbnail or simple list.
BLUE
Convert to Mark Mode.
EXIT
Return to normal TV viewing.
Using the remote control
To Movie List
Change Device
Change Numbers
Mark Mode
Exit
background
102
TO USE A USB DEVICE
TO USE A USB DEVICE
■ When selected music files are played
Page 1/1
Music List
Drive1
Page 1/1
001. - B01.mp3
00:00
002. -B02.mp3
00:00
003. B03.mp3
00:00
004. - B04.mp3
00:00
005. - B05.mp3
00:00
USB1 External
Mark
MARK
Mark Page Change
Move
P
Exit Mark Mode
Unmark All
Mark All
Play Marked
• When one or more music files are marked,
the marked music title will be played in
sequence. For example, if you want to listen
to only one music repeatedly, just mark the
music only and play it. If no music is marked,
all the music in the folder will be played in
sequence.
• If you want to activate Random playback, you
must set Option->Set audio play.->Random
to On.
Exit
Mark Mode
1
Select the target folder or drive.
2
Select the desired music title.
3
or
BLUE
Convert to Mark Mode.
4
Mark desired music file.
5
Marked music file is played.
RED
RED
Play the selected music file.
GREEN
Mark all music files on the screen.
YELLOW
Deselect all marked music files.
BLUE
Exit the Mark Mode.
EXIT
Return to normal TV viewing.
Using the remote control
background
103
TO USE A USB DEVICE
Set Audio Play.
Set Audio.
Close
Using the Music List function, play
NOTE
► Option values changed in Movie List does not affect Photo List and Music List.
► Option value changed in Photo List and Music List are changed likewise in Photo List and Music List
excluding Movie List.
► You can listen to the music only within the device currently played.
1
or
Show the Option menu.
2
Select Set Audio Play. or Set Audio.
Page 1/1
Music List
Drive1
Page 1/1
3 file(s) Marked
004. - B04.mp3
00:00
005. - B05.mp3
00:00
006. - B06.mp3
00:00
007. - B07.mp3
00:00
008. - B08.mp3
00:00
005. - B05.mp3
►
►
02:30 / 03:25
◄►
USB1 External
Hide
Exit
Option
Q.MENU
Play with Photo
■
►
II
◄◄ ►►
Choose options.
background
104
TO USE A USB DEVICE
TO USE A USB DEVICE
Using the remote control
■ Stop the playing music file.
► Press the PLAY
(
►
)
button to return to normal playback.
II
When you press the Pause
(
II
)
button while playing the file, the playback will be
paused.
When you press the Pause
(
II
)
button again while the playback is paused, it will
resume the playback.
◄◄ / ►►
When playing,
When you press the REW
(
◄◄
)
button, the previous music file will be played.
When you press the FF
(
►►
)
button, the next music file will be played.
GREEN
Start playing the selected music files and then move to the Photo List.
Press the ENERGY SAVING button repeatedly to change the brightness of your
screen.(Refer to p. 119)
Only Off/Screen Off operates from the Movie List, Photo List, Music List.
or
MENU
Q.MENU
Show the Option menu.
BACK
■ When you press the Back button while the music is playing, the music player
currently playing will be hidden and only the music list will be displayed.
EXIT
■ When you press the Exit button while the Music player is displayed, only the
music will be stopped and the player will not return to normal TV viewing.
■ When you press the Exit button while the music is stopped or while the music
player is hidden, the player will return to normal TV viewing.
< >
■ When using the
<
or
>
button during playback a cursor indicating the position can
be played.
■ When you select the Set Audio Play,
Previous
Set Audio Play.
On
Repeat
◄ ►
Off
Random
◄ ►
1
Select Repeat or Random.
2
Make appropriate adjustments.
background
105
TO USE A USB DEVICE
■ When you select the Set Audio,
1
Select Sound Mode, Auto
Volume, Clear Voice II or
Balance.
2
Make appropriate adjustments. (Refer
to p. 133 to 137)
Set Audio.
Standard
Sound Mode
◄
►
Off
Auto Volume
◄ ►
Off
Clear Voice II
Balance 0
◄ ►
Previous
L R
◄ ►
■ If you don't press any button for a while during the playing, the
play information box (as shown in the below) will float as a
screen saver.
■ The ‘Screen Saver’?
Screen saver is to prevent screen pixel damage due to an
fixed image remaining on the screen for a extended period of
time.
002. B02.mp3
► 00:31 / 04:04
NOTE
► A damaged or corrupted music file does not play but displays 00:00 in playtime.
► A music file downloaded from a paid service with copyright protection does not start but displays inappropri-
ate information in playtime.
► If you press OK, ■ buttons, screen saver is stopped.
► The PLAY(►), Pause(II), ■ , ►►, ◄◄ buttons on the remote control are also available in this mode.
► You can use the ►► button to select the next music file and the ◄◄ button to select the previous music
file.
background
106
TO USE A USB DEVICE
TO USE A USB DEVICE
DIVX REGISTRATION CODE
Confirm the DivX registration code number of the TV. Using the registration number, movies can be
rented or purchased at www.divx.com/vod.
With a DivX registration code from other TV, playback of rented or purchased DivX file is not allowed.
(Only DivX files matched with the registration code of the purchased TV are playable.)
NOTE
► Movie files are supported as follows
Resolution : under 1920x1080 WxH pixels
Frame rate : under 30 frames/sec(1920x1080), under 60 frames/sec(under 1280x720)
► Video Codec :
MPEG 1, MPEG 2, MPEG 4, H.264/AVC, DivX 3.11, DivX 4.12, DivX 5.x, DivX 6,
Xvid 1.00, Xvid 1.01, Xvid 1.02, Xvid 1.03, Xvid 1.10-beta1, Xvid 1.10-beta2, JPEG, VC1,
Sorenson H.263/H.264
►The DRM/*.tp /*.trp file in DLNA server is not played when Movie List is in operation.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
1
Select MY MEDIA.
BLUE
2
Select DivX Reg. Code.
3
Display DivX Reg. Code.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX
®
is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This
is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for
more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified
®
device must be regis-
tered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content. To generate the
registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to
vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and learn
more about DivX VOD.
“DivX Certified
®
to play DivX
®
video up to HD 1080p, including premium content”
“DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are registered trademarks of DivX,
Inc. and are used under license.”
“Pat. 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274”
You must register your device to
play DivX protected videos.
Registration code : **********
Register at http://vod.divx.com
Close
Movie List
Music List
Photo List
MY MEDIA
Exit
Option
Press OK( ) to see photos from the USB.
Previous
DivX Reg.Code
Deactivation
background
107
TO USE A USB DEVICE
DEACTIVATION
The purpose of deactivation is to allow deactivation of devices for users who have activated all the
available devices through the web_server and are blocked from activating more devices. DivX VOD
allowed the consumer to activate up to 6 devices under one account, but to replace or deactivate any
of those devices, the consumer had to contact DivX Support and request deletion. Now with this
added feature, consumers will be able to deactivate the device themselves and hence better manage
their DivX VOD devices.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
Deregistration code :
********
Deregister at http://vod.divx.com
Continue with registration?
Movie List Music ListPhoto List
MY MEDIA
Exit
Option
Press OK( ) to see photos from the USB.
1
Select MY MEDIA.
BLUE
2
Select Deactivation.
3
Select Yes.
4
Display Deactivation.
Previous
DivX Reg.Code
Deactivation
Yes No
background
108
GAME
GAME
Allows you to enjoy the games installed on the TV.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
1
Select GAME.
2
Select the desired game.
3
Enter the selected game mode.
Exit
Customer Support
Simple Manual
Press OK( ) to set programme settings.
PICTURE
LOCK
OPTION
TIME
MY MEDIA
AUDIO
GAME
SETUP
NETWORK
BLUETOOTH
GAME
JUMP
HOLE IN ONE WHACK A MOLE
SUDOKU
COOKING BURGER
SAVING CRYSTAL
INVADER
URGENT SURVIVAL
Exit
(Only 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**, 32/37/42/47/55LE55**, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***,
42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***)
GAME
background
109
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)
(IN DIGITAL MODE)
EPG(ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)
(IN DIGITAL MODE)
This system has an Electronic Programme Guide (EPG) to help your navigation through all the possible
viewing options.
The EPG supplies information such as programme listings, start and end times for all available services. In
addition, detailed information about the programme is often available in the EPG (the availability and
amount of these programme details will vary, depending on the particular broadcaster).
This function can be used only when the EPG information is broadcast by broadcasting companies.
You must set the Clock in the Time menu, before using EPG function.
The EPG displays the programme details for 8 days.
Shows next programme information.
Shows other programme information.
A pop-up window for remind settings appear.
Select Timer Remind setting mode.
DTV 2 TV2
Tyra
Talk show host Tyra Banks sits down with Keyshia Cole, the cast of Gossip Girl and Rihanna.
Talk show host Tyra Banks sits down with Keyshia Cole, the cast of Gossip Girl and Rihanna.
21:00
00:00 Show/Game Show
►
Schedule
◄ Now
Pr. Change
►
Yes No
Do you want to set a reminder for the
selected programme?
?
Bob The Builder Special
DTV 1 ABC TV Sydney
22 Dec. 2009 10:15~10:58
DTV 1 TV ONE
Good Morning
Sarah Bradley, Steve Gray and Brendon Pongia present the latest in fashion, the arts, entertainment, lifestyle and cooking,
with regular and special guests.
Sarah Bradley, Steve Gray and Brendon Pongia present the latest in fashion, the arts, entertainment, lifestyle and cooking,
with regular and special guests.
21:00
00:00 Show/Game Show
►
Watch
► Next
Pr. Change
►
16:9
...
MPEG
720p
▼
Up
Down
INFO
Shows current programme information
Displayed with a TV or DTV Programme. Displayed with a Teletext Programme.
Displayed with a Radio Programme. Displayed with a Subtitle Programme.
Displayed with a MHEG Programme. Displayed with a Scramble Programme.
MPEG
Displayed with a MPEG Programme.
Displayed with a Dolby Digital Programme.
Aspect ratio of broadcasting programme. Displayed with a Dolby Digital PLUS Programme.
Aspect ratio of broadcasting programme. 576i/p, 720p, 1080i/p : Resolution of broadcasting programme
(Except New Zealand)
background
110
EPG(ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL
MODE)
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)
(IN DIGITAL MODE)
110
SWITCH ON/OFF EPG
SELECT A PROGRAMME
1
Switch on or off EPG.
or
1
Select desired programme.
BUTTON FUNCTION IN NOW/NEXT GUIDE MODE
You can view a programme being broadcasted and one scheduled to follow.
RED
Change EPG mode.
YELLOW
Enter Manual Timer mode.
BLUE
Enter Schedule List mode.
When ‘Now’ is selected, it is moved to
selected programme and EPG disap-
pears
When ‘Next’ is selected, a reservation
pop-up window appears.
Select NOW or NEXT Programme.
Select the Broadcast Programme.
Page Up/Down.
or or
EXIT
Switch off EPG.
Select DTV or RADIO Programme.
INFO
Detail information on or off.
Programme Guide
ALL
NOW
NEXT
1 YLE TV1
Keno
World Business
2 YLE TV2
4 TV..
Your World Today
Fantomen
Legenen om Den....
Kritiskt
Naturtimmen
ABC
Lyssna
Tänään otsikoissa
Glamour
5 YLE FST
6 CNN
8 YLE24
▼
▲
That ’70s show
DTV 1 YLE TV1 25 Nov. 2008 09:45~10:15
25 Nov. 2008 10:05
RADIOWatch/Schedule
TV/RAD
Favourite
FAV
Manual Timer Schedule List
i Information
INFO
Mode
That ’70s show
background
111
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)
(IN DIGITAL MODE)
BUTTON FUNCTION IN 8 DAY GUIDE MODE
RED
Change EPG mode.
GREEN
Enter Date setting mode.
YELLOW
Enter Manual Timer mode.
BLUE
Enter Schedule List mode.
When ‘Currently broadcasting pro-
gramme’ is selected, it is moved to
selected programme and EPG disap-
pears
When ‘Future broadcasting programme’
is selected, a reservation pop-up window
appears.
Select Programme.
Select the Broadcast Programme.
Page Up/Down.
or or
EXIT
Switch off EPG.
Select DTV or RADIO Programme.
INFO
Detail information on or off.
Programme Guide
1 YLE TV1
2 YLE TV2
4 TV..
5 YLE FST
6 CNN
8 YLE24
▼
▲
Kungskonsumente
Mint Extra
The Drum
TV2: Farmen
The Drum
You Call The Hits
Fashion Essentials
... ... ... ... Tänään otsikoissa
ALL
DTV 1 YLE TV1 25 Nov. 2008 09:45~10:15
25 Nov. 2008 10:05
That ’70s show
Tue. 25 Nov.
14:00 15:00
▼
◄
◄
Antigues Roadshow
RADIOWatch/Schedule
TV/RAD
Favourite
FAV
Manual Timer Schedule List
i Information
INFO
Mode
Date
BUTTON FUNCTION IN DATE CHANGE MODE
Programme Guide
1 YLE TV1
2 YLE TV2
4 TV..
5 YLE FST
6 CNN
8 YLE24
▼
▲
Kungskonsumente
Mint Extra
The Drum
TV2: Farmen
The Drum
You Call The Hits
Fashion Essentials
... ... ... ... Tänään otsikoissa
ALL
DTV 1 YLE TV1 25 Nov. 2008 09:45~10:15
25 Nov. 2008 10:05
That ’70s show
Tue. 25 Nov.
14:00 15:00
▼
◄
◄
Antigues Roadshow
Date Change
Date Exit
GREEN
or or
Switch off Date
setting mode.
Change to the selected date.
Select a date.
or
EXIT
Switch off EPG.
background
112
EPG(ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL
MODE)
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)
(IN DIGITAL MODE)
BUTTON FUNCTION IN EXTENDED DESCRIPTION BOX
INFO
The detail information on or off.
Text Up/Down.
EXIT
or
Switch off EPG.
DTV 1 YLE TV1 25
25 Nov. 2008 10:05
Fia World Touring Car Chanpionship
Tue. 25 Nov. 2008 10:05 12:40
Fia Champion
Miss Gotto's Haunted house/Cry of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's
Haunted house/Cry of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted
house/Cry of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted house/Cry
of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted house/Cry of The
Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted house/Cry of The Swamp;
Watch Close
BUTTON FUNCTION IN REMIND SETTING MODE
Switch off Manual Timer mode.
Select Remind function setting.
Select Start Time or Programme.
Save Timer Remind.
Manual Timer
ExitMove
Programme Guide Schedule List
OK
Wed. 12 Aug. 2009 13:46
Select the date to schedule.
Sun.
09 10 11
Mon. Tue. Wed. Thu. Fri. Sat.
12 13 14 15
22
29
05
21
28
04
20
27
03
19
26
02
18
25
01
17
24
31
16
23
30
Wed. 12 Aug. 2009
No schedule list
OK
Prev.
Select time to remind.
▼
▲
Start Time
DTV 801 ANTV D...
Programme
15 : 09
Close
BUTTON FUNCTION IN SCHEDULE LIST MODE
If you’ve created a schedule list, a scheduled programme is displayed at the scheduled time even
when you are watching a different programme at the time.
YELLOW
Change to Manual Timer mode.
BLUE
or
Change to Guide mode.
Switch off Schedule List.
Select your desired Option(Modify/Delete/
Delete All).
Select Schedule List.
Page Up/Down.
Title
Start Date
6 May 16:00 Friend1
6 May 18:00 Friend2
Start Time
Manual Timer Programme Guide
Page1/1
Fri. 6 Apr. 2007 15:09
Exit
Modify/Delete
Remind
DTV 19 Dave
(Fri.)06/05/2007
16:00
Page Change
P
Move
ꔀ
Schedule List
Modify
Delete
Delete All
Close
Modify
►
Frend2
16:00
background
113
The TV gives you access to digital teletext which is greatly improved in various aspects such as text,
graphics etc.
This digital teletext can access special digital teletext services and specific services which broadcast
digital teletext.
TELETEXT WITHIN DIGITAL SERVICE
TELETEXT IN DIGITAL SERVICE
1
Press the numeric or P
button to select a
digital service which broadcasts digital teletext.
2
Follow the indications on digital teletext and
move onto the next step by pressing TEXT,
OK,
, RED, GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE
or NUMBER buttons and etc..
3
To change digital teletext service, select a dif-
ferent service by the numeric or P button.
1
Press the numeric or P
button to select a
certain service which broadcasts digital teletext.
2
Press the TEXT or coloured button to switch on
teletext.
3
Follow the indications on digital teletext and move
onto the next step by pressing OK,
, RED,
GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE or NUMBER buttons and
so on.
4
Press the TEXT or colour button to switch off
digital teletext and return to TV viewing.
Some services may allow you to access text ser-
vices by pressing the RED button.
MHEG (MULTIMEDIA AND HYPERMEDIA INFORMATION
CODING EXPERT GROUP)(IN DIGITAL MODE)
MHEG (MULTIMEDIA AND HYPERMEDIA INFORMATION
CODING EXPERT GROUP)(IN DIGITAL MODE)
(Only South Africa, Malaysia)
background
114
MHEG (MULTIMEDIA AND HYPERMEDIA INFORMATION
CODING EXPERT GROUP)(IN DIGITAL MODE)
(Only New Zealand)
This system has an MHEG(Multimedia and hypermedia information coding expert group) to help your navi-
gation through all the possible viewing options.
Switch on the MHEG.
1
SWITCH ON MHEG
1
The MHEG will disappear after
moving to a selected channel.
3
SELECT A PROGRAMME
This feature is enabled only in New Zealand.
- In New Zealand, pressing the Guide key will display MHEG EPG provided by New Zealand on the screen.
Preview the Broadcast Programme
Information.
2
change to desired channel.
INFO
Shows current programme information
Displayed with a TV or DTV Programme. Displayed with a Teletext Programme.
Displayed with a Radio Programme. Displayed with a Subtitle Programme.
Displayed with a MHEG Programme. Displayed with a Scramble Programme.
MPEG
Displayed with a MPEG Programme.
Displayed with a Dolby Digital Programme.
Aspect ratio of broadcasting programme. Displayed with a Dolby Digital PLUS Programme.
Aspect ratio of broadcasting programme. 576i/p, 720p, 1080i/p : Resolution of broadcasting programme
DTV 1 TV ONE
Good Morning
Sarah Bradley, Steve Gray and Brendon Pongia present the latest in fashion, the arts, entertainment, lifestyle and cooking,
with regular and special guests.
Sarah Bradley, Steve Gray and Brendon Pongia present the latest in fashion, the arts, entertainment, lifestyle and cooking,
with regular and special guests.
21:00
00:00 Show/Game Show
►
Watch
► Next
Pr. Change
►
16:9
720p
...
MEPG
▼
Up
Down
MHEG (MULTIMEDIA AND HYPERMEDIA INFORMATION
CODING EXPERT GROUP)(IN DIGITAL MODE)
background
115
MHEG (MULTIMEDIA AND HYPERMEDIA INFORMATION
CODING EXPERT GROUP)(IN DIGITAL MODE)
BUTTON FUNCTION IN NOW/NEXT MODE
You can view a channel being broadcasted and one scheduled to follow.
The MHEG will disappear after moving
to a selected channel.
Detail information on or off.
Select desired channel.
Switch off MHEG.
Change to Listing mode.
BUTTON FUNCTION IN LISTING MODE
Change to Next Day or Today.
BLUE
Detail information on or off.
Select Channel.
Select the Broadcast Programme
Information.
Change to Next Week or Prev Day.
YELLOW
Switch off MHEG.
Change to Now/Next mode.
The MHEG will disappear after
moving to a selected channel.
What’s on now/next.
2.33pm Tue 12 Feb
4 C4
Now 2.00pm The Officaial NZ Top 40
Next 4.00pm Vodafone Select Live
3 TV3
Now 2.00pm Oprah
Next 3.00pm Rugrats
2 TV2
Now 2.30pm Neighbours
Next 3.00pm Jojo’s Circus
1 TV ONE
Now 2.30pm Neighbours
Next 3.00pm Jojo’s Circus
5
Now 12.00am News : Te Kaea
Next 3.00pm Advice: Ask Your Auntie
Next Week
EPG/Guide
Today
EPG/Guide
19
INFO
INFO
background
116
PICTURE CONTROL
PICTURE CONTROL
•16:9
The following selection will allow you to adjust the
picture horizontally, in linear proportion, to fill the
entire screen(useful for viewing 4:3 formatted
DVDs).
• Just Scan
Following Selection will lead to you view the
picture of best quality without loss of original
picture in high resolution image.
Note : If there is noise in original Picture, You
can see the noise at the edge.
• Original
When your TV receives a wide screen signal it will
automatically change to the picture format broad-
cast.
• Full Wide (Only DTV)
When TV receives the wide screen signal, it will
lead you to adjust the picture horizontally or verti-
cally, in a linear proportion, to fill the entire screen
fully.
4:3 and 14:9 video is supported in full screen with-
out any video distortion through DTV input.
PICTURE SIZE (ASPECT RATIO) CONTROL
You can watch the screen in various picture formats; 16:9, Just Scan,
Original, Full Wide, 4:3, 14:9, Zoom and Cinema Zoom.
If a fixed image is displayed on the screen for a long time, that fixed
image may become imprinted on the screen and remain visible.
You can adjust the enlarge proportion using
button.
This function works in the following signal.
Just Scan
• You can also adjust Aspect Ratio in the
PICTURE menu.
• For Zoom Setting, select 14:9, Zoom and
Cinema Zoom in Ratio Menu. After com-
pleting Zoom Setting, the display goes
back to Q.Menu.
1
Select Aspect Ratio.
2
Select the desired picture format.
Full Wide
Original
Original
or
Full Wide
or
background
117
PICTURE CONTROL
• 4:3
The following selection will allow you to view a pic-
ture with an original 4:3 aspect ratio.
• 14:9
You can view a picture format of 14:9 or a general
TV programme in the 14:9 mode. The 14:9 screen
is viewed in the same way as in 4:3, but is moved
to the up and down.
• Zoom
The following selection will allow you to view
the picture without any alteration, while filling
the entire screen. However, the top and bottom
of the picture will be cropped.
• Cinema Zoom
Choose Cinema Zoom when you want to
enlarge the picture in correct proportion.
Note:When enlarging or reducing the picture,
the image may become distorted.
◄ or ► button: Adjust enlarge proportion of
Cinema Zoom. The adjustment range is 1 to 16.
▼ or ▲ button: Move the screen.
NOTE
► You can only select 4:3, 16:9 (Wide), 14:9, Zoom/Cinema Zoom in Component mode.
► You can only select 4:3, Original, 16:9 (Wide), 14:9, Zoom/Cinema Zoom in HDMI mode.
► You can only select 4:3, 16:9 (Wide) in RGB-PC, HDMI-PC mode only.
► In DTV/HDMI/Component (over 720p) mode, Just Scan is available.
► In DTV (over 576p) mode, Just Scan is available in Austalia only.
background
118
PICTURE CONTROL
PICTURE CONTROL
PICTURE WIZARD
This feature lets you adjust the picture quality of the original image.
Use this to calibrate the screen quality by adjusting the Black and White Level etc. General users can
calibrate the screen quality by easily following each stage.
When you adjust the image to Low, Recommended or High, you can see the changed result as an
example.
In RGB-PC/HDMI-PC/DVI-PC mode, the changed Colour, Tint and H/V Sharpness values are not
applied.
Picture Wizard
With Picture Wizard, you can adjust the picture quality of the
original image.
Next
Previous
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select PICTURE.
2
Select Picture Wizard.
3
Adjust Standard(Black Level,
White Level, Tint, Colour,
Horizontal Sharpness, Vertical
Sharpness, Backlight) or
Preferred(Black Level, White
Level, Tint, Colour, Sharpness,
Dynamic Contrast, Colour
Temperature, Backlight).
4
Select input source to apply
the settings.
5
OK
Move
● Aspect Ratio : 16:9
● Picture Wizard
● Energy Saving : Off
● Picture Mode : Standard
• Backlight 70
• Contrast 100
• Brightness 50
• Sharpness 70
PICTURE
● Picture Wizard
►
►
• If you stop the setting before the
final stage, the changes will not be
applied
• The adjustment value is saved to
Expert1.
• Once the Picture Wizard sets the
image quality, the Energy Saving is
changed into Off.
•
If the picture quality setting of
Expert1 is changed, use the
Picture Reset before entering the
Picture Wizard to reset the picture
quality setting.
•
Standard : mode to set standard
picture quality.
•
Preferred : mode to set user pre-
ferred picture quality rather than
standard picture.
background
119
PICTURE CONTROL
ENERGY SAVING
It reduces the TV’s power consumption.
The default factory setting is adjusted to the comfortable level to be viewed at home.
You can change the brightness of your screen by adjusting the Energy Saving level or by setting the
Picture Mode.
When adjusting Energy Saving in MHEG mode, the Energy Saving setting is applied after MHEG is
finished.
Selecting ‘Screen Off’ while tuned to a radio station channel will reduce power consumption.
•
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
• When you select Screen Off, the screen will be turned off in 3 seconds and Screen Off will start.
• If you adjust “Energy Saving-Auto(Except 22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LD4**, 19/22/26LE5***,
22/26LE6***, 26LE3***), Maximum”, Backlight feature will not work.
• You can also adjust this feature by selecting Energy Saving button on the remote control.
• When selecting Auto, Backlight is automatically adjusted through intelligent sensor according to the
surrounding condition when intelligent sensor is in the TV.
1
Select PICTURE.
2
Select
Energy Saving.
3
Select Auto(Except 22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LD4**, 19/22/26LE5***,
22/26LE6***, 26LE3***), Off, Minimum , Medium, Maximum or Screen Off.
OK
Move
● Aspect Ratio : 16:9
● Picture Wizard
● ꕊ Energy Saving : Off
● Picture Mode : Standard
• Backlight 70
• Contrast 100
• Brightness 50
• Sharpness 70
PICTURE
● Energy Saving : Off
Auto
Off
Minimum
Medium
Maximum
Screen Off
Off
►
►
OK
Move
● Aspect Ratio : 16:9
● Picture Wizard
● ꕊ Energy Saving : Off
● Picture Mode : Standard
• Backlight 70
• Contrast 100
• Brightness 50
• Sharpness 70
PICTURE
● Energy Saving : Off
background
120
PICTURE CONTROL
PICTURE CONTROL
PRESET PICTURE SETTINGS
Picture Mode-Preset
Vivid/Family Strengthen the contrast, brightness, colour and sharpness for vivid picture.
Standard The most general screen display status.
Cinema Optimizes video for watching movies.
Sport/Cricket Optimizes video for watching sports events.
Game Optimizes video for playing games.
• Picture Mode adjusts the TV for the best picture appearance. Select the preset value in the
Picture Mode menu based on the programme category.
• When the Intelligent sensor function is on, the most suitable picture is automatically adjusted
according to the surrounding conditions.
• You can also adjust Picture Mode in the Q. Menu.
• Intelligent Sensor : Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions.
•
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select PICTURE.
2
Select Picture Mode.
3
Select Intelligent Sensor(Except 22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LD4**, 22/26LE5***,
22/26LE6***, 26LE3***), Vivid/Family, Standard, Cinema, Sport/Cricket or Game.
OK
Move
● Aspect Ratio : 16:9
● Picture Wizard
● Energy Saving : Off
● Picture Mode : Standard
• Backlight 70
• Contrast 100
• Brightness 50
• Sharpness 70
PICTURE
● Picture Mode : Standard
Intelligent Sensor
Vivid
Standard
Cinema
Sport
Game
ꕋ Expert1
ꕋ Expert2
Standard
►
►
OK
Move
● Aspect Ratio : 16:9
● Picture Wizard
● ꕊ Energy Saving : Off
● Picture Mode : Standard
• Backlight 70
• Contrast 100
• Brightness 50
• Sharpness 70
PICTURE
● Picture Mode : Standard
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
background
121
PICTURE CONTROL
MANUAL PICTURE ADJUSTMENT
Picture Mode-User option
Backlight
To control the brightness of the screen, adjust the brightness of LCD panel.
Adjusting the backlight when setting the brightness of the set is recommended.
Contrast
Adjusts the signal level between black and white in the picture. You may use Contrast when the bright
part of the picture is saturated.
Brightness
Adjusts the base level of the signal in the picture.
Sharpness
Adjusts the level of crispness in the edges between the light and dark areas of the picture.
The lower the level, the softer the image.
Colour
Adjusts intensity of all colours.
Tint
Adjusts the balance between red and green levels.
Colour Temp.
Adjust to left direction to make a picture reddish or adjust to right direction to make a picture bluish.
It is not available to use this function in “Intelligent Sensor”.
•
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
OK
Move
● Aspect Ratio : 16:9
● Picture Wizard
● Energy Saving : Off
● Picture Mode : Standard
• Backlight 70
• Contrast 100
• Brightness 50
• Sharpness 70
PICTURE
● Picture Mode : Standard
Intelligent Sensor
Vivid
Standard
Cinema
Sport
Game
ꕋ Expert1
ꕋ Expert2
Standard
►
►
1
Select PICTURE.
2
Select Picture Mode.
3
Select Vivid/Family, Standard, Cinema, Sport/Cricket or
Game.
4
Select Backlight, Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness, Colour,
Tint or Colour Temp..
5
Make appropriate adjustments.
OK
Move
● Aspect Ratio : 16:9
● Picture Wizard
● ꕊ Energy Saving : Off
● Picture Mode : Standard
• Backlight 70
• Contrast 100
• Brightness 50
• Sharpness 70
PICTURE
● Picture Mode : Standard
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
background
122
PICTURE CONTROL
PICTURE CONTROL
• Benefits of using Backlight
- The electricity consumption is reduced by
up to 60 %.
- The black brightness is reduced. (As the
black has greater depth, you can enjoy a
better quality definition.)
- You can adjust brightness with maintaining
original signal resolution.
NOTE
► You cannot adjust colour, sharpness and tint in the RGB-PC/HDMI-PC mode.
► When the Expert 1/2 is selected, you can select Backlight, Contrast, Brightness,
H Sharpness, V
Sharpness
, Colour or Tint.
background
123
PICTURE CONTROL
PICTURE IMPROVEMENT TECHNOLOGY
You can calibrate the screen for each Picture Mode or set the video value according to the special
video screen.
You can set the video value differently for each input.
To reset to the factory default screen after making adjustments to each video mode, execute the
“Picture Reset” function for each Picture Mode.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select PICTURE.
2
Select Advanced Control.
3
Select your desired Source.:
Dynamic Contrast, Dynamic Colour, Clear White, Skin Colour, Noise Reduction,
Digital Noise Reduction, Gamma, Black Level, Eye Care, Real Cinema, Colour
Gamut or xvYCC. (Refer to p. 125 to 126)
4
Make appropriate adjustments.
OK
Move
PICTURE
• Sharpness 70
• Colour 60
• Tint 0
• Colour Temp.
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
• TruMotion : Off
• Screen
• Advanced Control
R G
W
C
OK
Dynamic Contrast
◄
Medium
►
Dynamic Colour
Medium
Skin Colour
0
Noise Reduction
Medium
Digital Noise Reduction
Medium
Black Level
Auto
Clear White
Off
Gamma
Medium
Close
▼
OK
Move
PICTURE
• Sharpness 70
• Colour 60
• Tint 0
• Colour Temp. 0
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
• TruMotion : Off
• Screen
• Advanced Control
R G
W
C
►
►
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
background
124
PICTURE CONTROL
PICTURE CONTROL
EXPERT PICTURE CONTROL
By segmenting categories, Expert1 and Expert2 provide more categories which users can set as they
see fit, offering the optimal picture quality for users.
This may also be used to help a professional optimize the TV performance using specific videos.
•
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select PICTURE.
2
Select Picture Mode.
3
Select Expert1 or Expert2.
4
Select Expert Control.
5
Select your desired Source.
6
Make appropriate adjustments.
OK
Move
● Aspect Ratio : 16:9
● Picture Wizard
● Energy Saving : Off
● Picture Mode : Standard
• Backlight 70
• Contrast 90
• Brightness 50
• H Sharpness 70
PICTURE
●
Picture Mode : Expert1
OK
Move
PICTURE
• H Sharpness 70
• V Sharpness 60
• Colour 60
• Tint 0
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
• TruMotion : Off
• Screen
R G
• Expert Control
Dynamic Contrast
◄
Medium
►
Noise Reduction
Medium
Digital Noise Reduction
Medium
Black Level
Auto
Real Cinema
On
Edge Enhancer
Expert Pattern
High
Off
xvYCC
Auto
Colour Gamut
EBU
Close
▼
Intelligent Sensor
Vivid
Standard
Cinema
Sport
Game
ꕋ Expert1
Expert2
Expert1
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
background
125
PICTURE CONTROL
*This feature is not available for all models.
Dynamic Contrast
(Off/Low/Medium/High)
■ Adjusts the contrast to keep it at the best level according to the brightness of
the screen. The picture is improved by making bright parts brighter and dark
parts darker.
Dynamic Colour
(Off/Low/High )
■ Adjusts screen colours so that they look livelier, richer and clearer. This fea-
ture enhances hue, saturation and luminance so that red, blue, green and
white look more vivid.
Skin Colour
(-5 to 5)
■ Adjusts skin colour of the picture so that user can set his favourite skin
colour.
Noise Reduction
(Off/Low/Medium/High/
Auto(In Analogue Mode
Only))
■ Reduces screen noise without compromising video quality.
Digital Noise Reduction
(Off/Low/Medium/High)
■ Reduces noise regarding MPEG compressed video.
Gamma
(Advanced Control:
Low/Medium/High
Expert Control:
1.9/2.2/2.4)
■ You can adjust brightness of dark area and middle gray level area of the picture.
• Low/1.9 : Makes dark and middle gray level area of the picture brighter.
• Medium/2.2 : Expresses original picture levels.
• High/2.4: Makes dark and middle gray level area of the picture darker.
Black Level
(Low/High/Auto)
• Low : The picture of the screen gets darker.
• High : The picture of the screen gets brighter.
• Auto : Sets black level of the screen to High or Low automatically according to
the input signal level.
■ This function enables to select 'Low' or 'High' in the following mode:
AV(NTSC-M), HDMI or Component. Otherwise, 'Black level' is set to 'Auto'.
Clear White
(Off/Low/High)
■ Makes the white area of the screen brighter and clearer.
Eye Care
(Low/High/Off)
*This feature is not available for all models.
■ Adjusts the brightness of the screen automatically to the best level for
eyes when the screen is too bright.
■ This feature is disable in “Picture Mode-Vivid/Family, Cinema, Expert1,
Expert2, Intelligent Sensor”.
Real Cinema/
Film Mode
(On/Off)
■ You can watch a cinema-like video by eliminating judder effect.
■ Uses this function when you watch film-originated movie contents.
■ This function can work when TruMotion is off.
background
126
PICTURE CONTROL
PICTURE CONTROL
Colour Gamut
(Advanced Control)
(Wide/Standard)
• Standard : Mode to use original colour area regardless of the display char-
acteristics.
• Wide: Mode to use maximum colour area of the TV display.
Colour Gamut
(Expert Control: EBU/
SMPTE/BT709/Wide/
Standard)
• Standard : Mode to use original colour area regardless of the display char-
acteristics.
• Wide : Mode to use maximum colour area of the TV display.
• EBU : Mode to display EBU colour area.
• SMPTE : Mode to display SMPTE colour area.
• BT709 : Mode to display BT709 colour area.
Edge Enhancer
(Off/Low/High)
■ Makes the edge of the picture clearer and distinctive.
■ This function can use in “Picture Mode-Expert.”
xvYCC
(Auto/off/on)
*This feature is not available for all models.
■ This is the function to express richer colour.
■ This function is enabled in "Picture mode - Cinema, Expert" when xvYCC sig-
nal is inputted through HDMI
Expert Pattern
(Off/Pattern1/Pattern2)
■ This is the pattern necessary for checking the picture of Digital TV.
■ This function is enabled in "Picture Mode - Expert" when you watch DTV.
Colour Filter
(Off/Red/Green/Blue)
■ This is the function to filter the specific colours of the video.
You can use the RGB filter to set colour saturation and hue accurately.
Colour Temperature
(Medium/Warm/Cool)
This is the function to adjust the overall colour of the screen to the feeling you want.
a. • Method : 2 Points
• Pattern: Inner, Outer
• Red/Green/Blue Contrast, Red/Green/Blue Brightness:
The adjustment range is -50 to +50.
b. • Method : 10 point IRE
• Pattern: Inner / Outer
• IRE (Institute of Radio Engineers) is the unit to display the size of the video sig-
nal and can be set among 10, 20, 30 to 100. You can adjust Red, Green or Blue
according to each setting.
• Luminance: This function displays calculated luminance value for 2.2 gamma.
You can input luminance value you want at 100 IRE, than the target luminance
value for 2.2 gamma is displayed at every 10 steps from 10 IRE to 90 IRE.
• Red/Green/Blue: The adjustment range is -50 to +50.
Colour Management
System
■ As the tool used by the experts to make adjustments by using the test pat-
terns, this does not affect other colours but can be used to selectively
adjust the 6 colour areas (Red/Green/Blue/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow).
Colour difference may not be distinctive even when you make the adjust-
ments for the general video.
■ Adjusts Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta.
• Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan, Magenta Colour : The adjustment
range is -30 to +30.
•
Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta Tint : The adjustment
range is
-30 to +30.
■ This feature is disable in RGB-PC and HDMI (PC) mode.
background
127
PICTURE CONTROL
OK
Move
PICTURE
• Sharpness 70
• Colour 60
• Tint 0
• Colour Temp.
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
• TruMotion : Off
• Screen
PICTURE RESET
Settings of the selected picture modes return to the default factory settings.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select PICTURE.
2
Select Picture Reset.
3
Select Yes.
4
Initialize the adjusted value.
R G
W
C
• Picture Reset
All picture setting will be reset.
Continue?
Yes No
?
OK
Move
PICTURE
• Sharpness 70
• Colour 60
• Tint 0
• Colour Temp. 0
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
• TruMotion : Off
• Screen
R G
W
C
• Picture Reset
►
►
background
128
PICTURE CONTROL
PICTURE CONTROL
TRUMOTION
It is used for the best picture quality without any motion blur or judder when you enter a quick image
or Film Source.
High : Provides smoother picture movement.
Low : Provides smooth picture movement. Use this setting for standard use.
Off : Turn off TruMotion Operation.
User : User can adjust Judder and Blur level in TruMotion Operation, separately.
- Judder : Adjusts noise of the screen.
- Blur : Adjusts after-image of the screen.
This feature is disable in RGB-PC, HDMI-PC and MY MEDIA-Photo List mode.
If you enable "
TruMotion", noise may appear on the screen.
If this occurs, set "
TruMotion" to "Off".
•
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select PICTURE.
2
Select TruMotion.
3
Select Low, High, User or Off.
4
Make appropriate adjustments.
OK
Move
PICTURE
• Sharpness 70
• Colour 60
• Tint 0
• Colour Temp. 0
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
• TruMotion
• Screen
R G
W
C
• TruMotion : Off
►
►
TruMotion
◄
Low
►
● Judder 3
● Blur 3
OK
*This feature is not available for all models.
background
129
PICTURE CONTROL
LED LOCAL DIMMING
(Only 42/47/55LE55**, 42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***)
After analyzing the signal of the input video by areas of the screen, it adjusts the backlight to improve
the contrast ratio.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select PICTURE.
2
Select LED Local Dimming.
3
Select On or Off.
OK
Move
PICTURE
• Colour 60
• Tint 0
• Colour Temp. 0
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
• TruMotion : Off
• Screen
• LED Local Dimming : On
R G
W
C
• LED Local Dimming : On
►
OK
Move
PICTURE
• Colour 60
• Tint 0
• Colour Temp. 0
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
• TruMotion : Off
• Screen
• LED Local Dimming : On
R G
W
C
• LED Local Dimming : On
►
Off
Teletext
On
►
background
130
PICTURE CONTROL
PICTURE CONTROL
POWER INDICATOR
Adjust the power/standby indicator light on the front of the TV.
Standby Light
Determines whether to set the indicator light on the front of the TV to On or Off in standby mode.
Power Light
Determines whether to set the indicator light on the front of the TV to On or Off when the power turns
on.
If you select 3D mode, Power indicator is turned off automatically.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select OPTION.
2
Select Power Indicator.
3
Select Standby Light or Power Light.
4
Select your desired Source.
OK
Move
● Language(Language)
● Country : Australia
● Hard of Hearing (ꔞ) : Off
● Power Indicator
● Factory Reset
● Set ID : 1
● Mode Setting : Home Use
● IR Blaster : Off
OPTION
● Power Indicator
Standby Light
On
◄
On
►
Close
Power Light
OK
Move
● Language(Language)
● Country : Australia
● Hard of Hearing (ꔞ) : Off
● Power Indicator
● Factory Reset
● Set ID : 1
● Mode Setting : Home Use
● IR Blaster : Off
OPTION
● Power Indicator
►
►
background
131
PICTURE CONTROL
MODE SETTING
We recommend setting the TV to “Home Use ” mode for the best picture in your home environment.
“Store Demo ” mode is an optimal setting for displaying at stores.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select OPTION.
2
Select Mode Setting.
3
Select Store Demo or Home Use.
4
Save.
OK
Move
● Language(Language)
● Country : Australia
● Hard of Hearing (ꔞ) : Off
● Power Indicator
● Factory Reset
● Set ID : 1
● Mode Setting : Home Use
● IR Blaster : Off
OPTION
● Mode Setting : Home Use
OK
Move
● Language(Language)
● Country : Australia
● Hard of Hearing (ꔞ) : Off
● Power Indicator
● Factory Reset
● Set ID : 1
● Mode Setting : Home Use
● IR Blaster : Off
OPTION
● Mode Setting : Home Use
►
Off
Close
●
Demo Mode
Selecting the environment.
Choose the setting mode you want.
Select [Home Use] to use this TV at home. To use
this TV at store, select [Store Demo].
Home Use
Store Demo
background
132
PICTURE CONTROL
PICTURE CONTROL
DEMO MODE
It is not possible to use Demo Mode in Home Use mode.
In Store Demo, Demo Mode is automatically set to On.
Once Demo Mode is set to Off in Store Demo, Demo Mode does not run and only the screen is
reset.
The screen is reset automatically after 5 minutes in Demo Mode.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select OPTION.
2
Select Mode Setting.
3
Select Store Demo.
Select On.
5
Move to the previous menu screen.
If you want to stop the demo, press any button. (except
for MUTE, + , - button)
OK
Move
● Language(Language)
● Country : Australia
● Hard of Hearing (ꔞ) : Off
● Power Indicator
● Factory Reset
● Set ID : 1
● Mode Setting : Home Use
● IR Blaster : Off
OPTION
● Mode Setting : Home Use
OK
Move
● Language(Language)
● Country : Australia
● Hard of Hearing (ꔞ) : Off
● Power Indicator
● Factory Reset
● Set ID : 1
● Mode Setting : Home Use
● IR Blaster : Off
OPTION
● Mode Setting : Home Use
►
On
Close
●
Demo Mode
Selecting the environment.
Choose the setting mode you want.
Select [Store Demo] to use this TV in store. To use
this TV at home, select [Home Use].
Home Use
Store Demo
4
background
133
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
AUTO VOLUME LEVELER
Auto Volume automatically remains on the same level of volume if you change programmes.
Because each broadcasting station has its own signal conditions, volume adjustment may be needed
every time the channel is changed. This feature allows users to enjoy stable volume levels by making
automatic adjustments for each programme.
If sound quality or volume is not at the level you want, it is recommended to use a separate home the-
ater system or amp to cope with different user environments.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select AUDIO.
2
Select Auto Volume.
3
Select On or Off.
OK
Move
● Auto Volume : Off
● Clear Voice II : Off 3
● Balance 0
● Sound Mode : Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble 50
• Bass 50
• Reset
AUDIO
L R
● Auto Volume : Off
OK
Move
● Auto Volume : Off
● Clear Voice II : Off 3
● Balance 0
● Sound Mode : Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble 50
• Bass 50
• Reset
AUDIO
L R
● Auto Volume : Off
►
MHEG
On
Off
►
background
134
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
CLEAR VOICE II
By differentiating the human sound range from others, it helps users listen to human voices better.
Adjustment for Clear Voice Level With selecting On
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
• If you select “On” for Clear Voice II,
Infinite Sound feature will not work.
• Select levels from ‘-6’ to ’+6’.
1
Select AUDIO.
2
Select Clear Voice II.
3
Select On or Off.
4
Select Level.
5
Make desired adjustment.
OK
Move
● Auto Volume : Off
● Clear Voice II : Off 3
● Balance 0
● Sound Mode : Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble 50
• Bass 50
• Reset
AUDIO
L R
● Clear Voice II : Off 3
OK
Move
● Auto Volume : Off
● Clear Voice II : Off 3
● Balance 0
● Sound Mode : Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble 50
• Bass 50
• Reset
AUDIO
L R
● Clear Voice II : Off 3
◄
Off
►
Close
●
Level 3
●
Clear Voice II
-
+
►
►
background
135
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
PRESET SOUND SETTINGS-SOUND MODE
You can select your preferred sound setting; Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport/Cricket or Game and
you can also adjust the Treble, Bass.
Sound Mode lets you enjoy the best sound without any Special adjustment as the TV sets the appro-
priate sound options based on the programme content.
Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport/Cricket and Game are preset for optimum sound quality at the factory.
Standard Offers standard-quality sound.
Music Optimizes sound for listening to music.
Cinema Optimizes sound for watching movies.
Sport/Cricket Optimizes sound for watching sports events.
Game Optimizes sound for playing games.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
• You can also adjust Sound Mode in the Q.
Menu.
1
Select AUDIO.
2
Select Sound Mode.
3
Select Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport/Cricket or Game.
OK
Move
● Auto Volume : Off
● Clear Voice II : Off 3
● Balance 0
● Sound Mode : Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble 50
• Bass 50
• Reset
AUDIO
● Sound Mode : Standard
L R
OK
Move
● Auto Volume : Off
● Clear Voice II : Off 3
● Balance 0
● Sound Mode : Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble 50
• Bass 50
• Reset
AUDIO
● Sound Mode : Standard
L R
►
►
Standard
Music
Cinema
Sport
Game
Standard
►
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
background
136
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
SOUND SETTING ADJUSTMENT -USER MODE
INFINITE SOUND
Select this option to sound realistic.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
Infinite Sound : Infinite Sound is a patented
LG proprietary sound processing technology
that strives immersive 5.1 surround sound
impression with front two loudspeakers.
1
Select AUDIO.
2
Select Sound Mode.
3
Select Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport/Cricket or Game.
4
Select Treble or Bass.
5
Set the desired sound level.
1
Select AUDIO.
2
Select Infinite Sound.
3
Select On or Off.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
OK
Move
● Auto Volume : Off
● Clear Voice II : Off 3
● Balance 0
● Sound Mode : Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble 50
• Bass 50
• Reset
AUDIO
● Sound Mode : Standard(User)
L R
OK
Move
● Auto Volume : Off
● Clear Voice II : Off 3
● Balance 0
● Sound Mode : Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble 50
• Bass 50
• Reset
AUDIO
● Sound Mode : Standard(User)
L R
Standard
Music
Cinema
Sport
Game
Standard(User)
►
►
►
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
background
137
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
BALANCE
You can adjust the sound balance of the speakers to preferred levels.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select AUDIO.
2
Select Balance.
3
Make desired adjustment.
OK
Move
● Auto Volume : Off
● Clear Voice II : Off 3
● Balance 0
● Sound Mode : Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble 50
• Bass 50
• Reset
AUDIO
● Balance 0
L R
OK
Move
● Auto Volume : Off
● Clear Voice II : Off 3
● Balance 0
● Sound Mode : Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble 50
• Bass 50
• Reset
AUDIO
● Balance 0
L R
●
Balance 0
◄ ►
Close
L R
►
►
background
138
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
TV SPEAKERS ON/ OFF SETUP
You can adjust the TV internal speaker status.
In AV, COMPONENT, RGB and HDMI with HDMI to DVI cable, the TV speaker can be operational
even when there is no video signal.
If you wish to use an external Hi-Fi system, turn off the TV’s internal speakers.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
NOTE
► When the TV speaker is turned off while the Simplink home theater is operating, the sound output automati-
cally switches to the Home theater speaker, but when the TV speaker is turned on, the sound output the
TV speaker.
► Some menus in AUDIO are disabled when TV Speaker is set to Off.
1
Select AUDIO.
2
Select TV Speaker.
3
Select On or Off.
OK
Move
● Sound Mode : Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble 50
• Bass 50
• Reset
● Digital Audio Out : PCM
● TV Speaker : On
● DTV Audio Setting : Auto
AUDIO
● TV Speaker : On
OK
Move
● Sound Mode : Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble 50
• Bass 50
• Reset
● Digital Audio Out : PCM
● TV Speaker : On
● DTV Audio Setting : Auto
AUDIO
● TV Speaker : On
Off
PCM
On
►
►
►
background
139
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
DTV AUDIO SETTING (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY)
When different audio types exist in an input signal, this function allows you to select the audio type
you want.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
•
Auto: Automatically outputs in the order Dolby Digital+ > Dolby Digital > MPEG.
•
Dolby Digital +, Dolby Digital, MPEG: Allows users to select the audio type they want. ex) If
MPEG is selected, MPEG is always outputted.
If MPEG is not supported, another audio type is set in that order.
• Refer to p. 145 to 146 (Audio Language Selection)
1
Select AUDIO.
2
Select DTV Audio Setting.
3
Select Auto, Dolby Digital +, Dolby Digital
or MPEG.
OK
Move
● Sound Mode : Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble 50
• Bass 50
• Reset
● Digital Audio Out : PCM
● TV Speaker : On
● DTV Audio Setting : Auto
AUDIO
● DTV Audio Setting : Auto
OK
Move
● Sound Mode : Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble 50
• Bass 50
• Reset
● Digital Audio Out : PCM
● TV Speaker : On
● DTV Audio Setting : Auto
AUDIO
● DTV Audio Setting : Auto
Auto
MUTE
Dolby Digital+
Dolby Digital
MPEG
Auto
►
►
(Only DTV)
background
140
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
SELECTING DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
It is possible to use in DTV, HDMI, DivX mode.
This function allows you to select your preferred Digital Audio Output.
When Dolby Digital is available, selecting Auto in the Digital Audio Out menu will set SPDIF(Sony
Philips Digital InterFace) output to Dolby Digital.
If Auto is selected in the digital audio out menu when Dolby Digital is not available, SPDIF output will
be PCM(Pulse-code modulation).
Even if both Dolby Digital and Audio language have been set in a channel which broadcast Dolby
Digital Audio, only Dolby Digital will be played.
•
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select AUDIO.
2
Select Digital Audio Out.
3
Select Auto or PCM.
OK
Move
● Sound Mode : Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble 50
• Bass 50
• Reset
● Digital Audio Out : PCM
● TV Speaker : On
● DTV Audio Setting : Auto
AUDIO
● Digital Audio Out : PCM
OK
Move
● Sound Mode : Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble 50
• Bass 50
• Reset
● Digital Audio Out : PCM
● TV Speaker : On
● DTV Audio Setting : Auto
AUDIO
● Digital Audio Out : PCM
Auto
PCM
PCM
►
►
►
Item Audio Input Digital Audio output
Auto(Speaker On)
MPEG
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
PCM
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital
PCM
Auto(Speaker Off)
MPEG
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
PCM
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital
PCM
All PCM
background
141
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
Settings of the selected Sound Mode return to the default factory settings.
AUDIO RESET
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
OK
Move
● Sound Mode : Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble 50
• Bass 50
• Reset
● Digital Audio Out : PCM
● TV Speaker : On
● DTV Audio Setting : Auto
AUDIO
• Reset
OK
Move
● Sound Mode : Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble 50
• Bass 50
• Reset
● Digital Audio Out : PCM
● TV Speaker : On
● DTV Audio Setting : Auto
AUDIO
• Reset
►
►
All audio settings will be resetted.
Continue?
Yes No
?
1
Select AUDIO.
2
Select Reset.
3
Select Yes.
4
Initialize the adjusted value.
background
142
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
I/II
■ Mono sound selection
If the stereo signal is weak in stereo reception, you can switch to mono. In mono reception, the clar-
ity of sound is improved.
■ Language selection for dual language broadcast (Except for Singapore, New Zealand and
Indonesia)
If a programme can be received in two languages (dual language), you can switch to DUAL I, DUAL
II or DUAL I+II.
DUAL I Sends the primary broadcast language to the loudspeakers.
DUAL II Sends the secondary broadcast language to the loudspeakers.
DUAL I+II Sends a separate language to each loudspeaker.
STEREO/DUAL RECEPTION (IN ANALOGUE MODE ONLY)
When a programme is selected, the sound information for the station appears with the programme
number and station name.
Broadcast On Screen Display
Mono
MONO
Stereo
STEREO
Dual (Except for Singapore, New Zealand and
Indonesia)
DUAL I, DUAL II, DUAL I+II (Except for Singapore, New Zealand
and Indonesia)
NICAM (Only Singapore, New Zealand and Indonesia) NICAM (Only Singapore, New Zealand and Indonesia)
1
Select Audio or Audio Language.
2
Select the sound output.
background
143
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
NICAM RECEPTION (IN ANALOGUE MODE ONLY)
(Except for Singapore, New Zealand and Indonesia)
If the TV is equipped with a receiver for NICAM reception, high quality NICAM (Near Instantaneous
Companding Audio Multiplex) digital sound can be received.
Sound output can be selected according to the type of broadcast received.
SPEAKER SOUND OUTPUT SELECTION
In AV, Component, RGB and HDMI mode, you can select output sound for the left and right
loudspeakers.
Select the sound output.
L+R: Audio signal from audio L input is sent to the left loudspeaker and audio signal from
audio R input is sent to the right loudspeaker.
L+L: Audio signal from audio L input is sent to left and right loudspeakers.
R+R: Audio signal from audio R input is sent to left and right loudspeakers.
1
When NICAM mono is received, you can select NICAM MONO or FM MONO.
2
When NICAM stereo is received, you can select NICAM STEREO or FM MONO.
If the stereo signal is weak, switch to FM MONO.
3
When NICAM dual is received, you can select NICAM DUAL I, NICAM DUAL II or
NICAM DUAL I+II or FM MONO.
background
144
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
ON-SCREEN MENU LANGUAGE / COUNTRY
SELECTION
The installation guide menu appears on the TV screen when it is switched on for the first time.
* If you want to change Language/ Country selection
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
NOTE
► If you do not finish the set-up Installation Guide by pressing BACK or if you time out on the OSD (On
Screen Display) the installation menu will continuously appear until the set up is completed whenever the
TV is switched on.
► If you select the wrong local country, teletext may not appear correctly on the screen and some problems
may occur during teletext operation.
► DTV mode control buttons may not function based on country broadcasting circumstances. (Only DTV)
► In country that Digital broadcasting regulation isn’t fixed, some DTV function may not work depending on
digital broadcasting circumstances. (Only DTV)
1
Select your desired language. (Except for Australia, New Zealand, Singapore and
South Africa.)
2
Select your country. (Only Australia & New Zealand)
4
1
Select OPTION.
2
Select Language(Language).
3
Select Menu Language. (Except
for Australia, New Zealand,
Singapore and South Africa.)
Select your desired language.
5
Save.
1
Select OPTION.
2
Select Country(Only
Australia & New
Zealand).
3
Select your country.
4
Save.
background
145
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
The Audio function allows selection of a preferred language.
If audio data in a selected language is not broadcast, the default language audio will be played.
Use the Subtitle function when two or more subtitle languages are broadcast. If subtitle data in a
selected language is not broadcast, the default language subtitle will be displayed.
When the languages you selected as the primary for Audio Language and Subtitle Language and Text
Language are not supported, you can select language in secondary category (Only New Zealand).
In Digital mode, use the
Text
language function when two or more
Text
languages are broadcast. If tele-
text data in a selected language is not broadcast, the default
Text
language will be displayed.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY)
1
Select OPTION.
2
Select Language(Language).
3
Select Audio Language or Subtitle
Language or Text Language.
4
Select your desired language.
5
Save.
1
Select OPTION.
2
Select
Hard of Hearing
( )
.
3
Select On or Off.
NOTE
► It is only available to use Hard of Hearing
on some TV stations in New Zealand.
(Only DTV)
background
146
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
< Audio Language Selection >
► When two or more audio languages are broadcast, you can
select the audio language.
- The audio/subtitles can be displayed in a simpler form with 1 to 3 characters broadcast by the
service provider.
- When you select supplementary Audio (Audio for “Visual/Hearing Impaired”) the TV may output
a part of the Main audio.
< Subtitle Language Selection >
► When two or more subtitle languages are broadcast, you
can select the subtitle language with the SUBTITLE button
on the remote control.
► Press the button to select a subtitle language.
Subtitle Language OSD Information
Audio Language OSD Information
Display Status
N.A Not Available
Teletext Subtitle
Subtitle for “Hard of Hearing”
1
Select Audio or Audio
Language.
Select an audio language.
2
Analogue
TV
Digital TV
Except 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**,
32/37/42/47/55LE55
*
*, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***,
42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***
Only 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**,
32/37/42/47/55LE55
*
*, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***,
42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***
Manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
• There is a possibility that when HDMI
mode, some DVD players do not make
SPDIF sound. At that time, set the out-
put of the digital audio of the DVD player
to PCM. (In HDMI, Dolby Digital Plus is
not supported).
Manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby “and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
• There is a possibility that when HDMI
mode, some DVD players do not make
SPDIF sound. At that time, set the output
of the digital audio of the DVD player to
PCM. (In HDMI, Dolby Digital Plus is not
supported).
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
"Dolby" and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
Display Status
N.A Not Available
MPEG Audio
Dolby Digital Audio
Audio for “Visual Impaired”
Audio for “Hearing Impaired”
Dolby Digital Plus Audio
MUTE
background
147
TIME SETTING
TIME SETTING
The clock is set automatically when receiving a digital signal in Auto mode. You can set the clock
manually in Manual mode.
You must set the time correctly before using on/off timer function.
< Only Australia >
When you select a Time Zone city, the TV time is set by the time offset information based on Time
Zone and GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) which is received with the broadcast signal and the time is
set automatically by a digital signal.
<Only Indonesia, Israel>
GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) which is received with the broadcast signal and the time is set automati-
cally by a digital signal.
Time Zone is activated only in Auto Mode.
CLOCK SETUP
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select TIME.
2
Select Clock.
3
Select Auto or Manual. (Only DTV)
4
Select either the year, month, date, time or Time Zone(Only Australia, Indonesia and
Israel) option.
5
Set the year, month, date, time or Time Zone (Only Australia, Indonesia and Israel)
option.
OK
Move
● Clock
● Off Time : Off
● On Time : Off
● Sleep Timer : Off
TIME
● Clock
OK
Move
● Clock
● Off Time : Off
● On Time : Off
● Sleep Timer : Off
TIME
● Clock
►
Analogue
TV
Digital TV
Except 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**,
32/37/42/47/55LE55
*
*, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***,
42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***
Only 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**,
32/37/42/47/55LE55
*
*, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***,
42/47/55LE8***, 42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***
Manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
• There is a possibility that when HDMI
mode, some DVD players do not make
SPDIF sound. At that time, set the out-
put of the digital audio of the DVD player
to PCM. (In HDMI, Dolby Digital Plus is
not supported).
OK
Move
Date
3
Month
Mar.
Year
2008
Hour
16
Minute
09
Time Zone
NSW/ACT
Close
◄
Auto
►
GMT+10.0
Only Australia, Indonesia and Israel
Only DTV
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
background
148
TIME SETTING
TIME SETTING
AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING
The Off time function automatically switches the TV to standby at a preset time.
Two hours after the TV is switched on by the on time function it will automatically switch back to stand-
by mode unless a button has been pressed. (Except for 32/37/42/47LD460C, 32/37/42/47/55LE750C,
32/37/42/47/55LE530C)
The Off time function overrides the On time function if both are set to the same time.
The TV must be in standby mode for the On time to work.
• To cancel On/Off Time function, select Off.
• For On Time function only
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select TIME.
2
Select Off Time or On Time.
3
Select Repeat.
4
Select Off, Once, Daily, Mon. ~ Fri.,
Mon. ~ Sat., Sat. ~ Sun. or Sun..
5
Set the hour.
6
Set the minutes.
1
Select Input.
2
Select the input source.
3
Set the programme.
4
Adjust volume level at switch-on.
OK
Move
● Clock
● Off Time : Off
● On Time : Off
● Sleep Timer : Off
TIME
● On Time : Off
OK
Move
● Clock
● Off Time : Off
● On Time : Off
● Sleep Timer : Off
TIME
● On Time : Off
Repeat
◄
Off
►
Hour
00
Minute
00
Input
Antenna
Programme
TV1
Volume
30
Close
1 Mar 2007 16:09
►
►
background
149
TIME SETTING
SLEEP TIMER SETTING
You do not have to remember to switch the TV off before you go to sleep.
The sleep timer automatically switches the TV to standby after the preset time has elapsed.
• When you switch the TV off, the preset sleep timer is cancelled.
• You can also adjust Sleep Timer in the TIME menu.
1
Select Sleep Timer.
2
Select Off, 10, 20, 30, 60, 90, 120, 180 or 240 min.
background
150
PARENTAL CONTROL /
RATINGS
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
SET PASSWORD & LOCK SYSTEM
Enter the password, press ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’ on the remote control handset.
If a channel is locked, enter the password to unlock it temporarily.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select LOCK.
2
Select Lock System.
3
Select On.
4
Set the password.
Input a 4-digit password.
Be sure to remember this number!
Re-enter new password for confirm.
• If you forget your password, press ‘0’, ‘3’,
‘2’, ‘5’ on the remote control handset.
OK
Move
● Set Password
● Lock System : Off
● Block Programme
● Parental Guidance : Blocking Off
● Input Block
● Key Lock : Off
LOCK
● Lock System : Off
OK
Move
● Set Password
● Lock System : Off
● Block Programme
● Parental Guidance : Blocking Off
● Input Block
● Key Lock : Off
LOCK
● Lock System : Off
►
►
Off
Teletext
On
►
5
background
151
PARENTAL CONTROL /
RATINGS
BLOCK PROGRAMME
Blocks any programme that you do not want to watch or that you do not want your children to watch.
It is available to use this function in Lock System ”On”.
Enter a password to watch a blocked programme.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select LOCK.
2
Select Lock System.
3
Select Block Programme.
4
Enter the Block Programme.
5
YELLOW
Select a programme to be locked.
OK
Move
● Set Password
● Lock System : On
● Block Programme
● Parental Guidance : Blocking Off
● Input Block
● Key Lock : Off
LOCK
● Block Programme
Page Change
P
Navigation
Previous
Block/Unblock
Pr. Change
DTV
RADIO
TV
1 Nine Digital
4 7 Digital
7 7 Digital2
2 Nine Digital HD
5 7 HD Digital
8 7 Digital3
3 Nine Guide
6 7 Digital 1
9 7 Guide
Page 1/1
Programme Edit
Favourite Group :
C
▲
▼
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
background
152
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
PARENTAL CONTROL /
RATINGS
PARENTAL CONTROL (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY)
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select LOCK.
2
Select Lock System.
3
Select Parental Guidance.
4
Make appropriate adjustments.
This function operates according to information from the broadcasting station. Therefore if the signal
has incorrect information, this function does not operate.
A password is required to gain access to this menu.
This set is programmed to remember which option it was last set to even if you switch the set off.
Prevents children from watching certain adult’s TV programmes, according to the ratings limit set.
Enter a password to watch a blocked programme.
Rating differs by country.
OK
Move
● Set Password
● Lock System : On
● Block Programme
● Parental Guidance : Blocking Off
● Input Block
● Key Lock : Off
LOCK
● Parental Guidance : Blocking Off
▲
▼
OK
Move
● Set Password
● Lock System : On
● Block Programme
● Parental Guidance : Blocking Off
● Input Block
● Key Lock : Off
LOCK
● Parental Guidance : Blocking Off
▲
▼
Blocking Off : Permits all
programmes
Blocking Off
Block All
G
PG
M
MA
AV
R
▲
(Only DTV)
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
background
153
PARENTAL CONTROL /
RATINGS
EXTERNAL INPUT BLOCKING
Enables you to block an input.
It is available to use this function in Lock System ”On”.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select LOCK.
2
Select Lock System.
3
Select Input Block.
4
Select input source.
5
Select On or Off.
OK
Move
● Set Password
● Lock System : On
● Block Programme
● Parental Guidance : Blocking Off
● Input Block
● Key Lock : Off
LOCK
● Input Block
▲
▼
OK
Move
● Set Password
● Lock System : On
● Block Programme
● Parental Guidance : Blocking Off
● Input Block
● Key Lock : Off
LOCK
● Input Block
▲
▼
●
AV1
●
AV2
●
Component1
●
Component2
●
RGB
●
HDMI1
●
HDMI2
●
HDMI3
◄
Off
►
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Close
Off
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
background
154
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
PARENTAL CONTROL /
RATINGS
KEY LOCK
This feature can be used to prevent unauthorized viewing by locking out the front panel controls, so
that it can only be used with the remote control.
This TV is programmed to remember which option it was last set to even if you turn the TV off.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
1
Select LOCK.
2
Select Key Lock.
3
Select On or Off.
OK
Move
● Set Password
● Lock System : Off
● Block Programme
● Parental Guidance : Blocking Off
● Input Block
● Key Lock : Off
LOCK
● Key Lock : Off
OK
Move
● Set Password
● Lock System : Off
● Block Programme
● Parental Guidance : Blocking Off
● Input Block
● Key Lock : Off
LOCK
● Key Lock : Off
►
•
In Key Lock ‘On’, if the TV is turned off, press the
/ I
, INPUT, P
button on the TV or POWER
INPUT, P
or NUMBER buttons on the remote
control then the set will be turned on.
• With the Key Lock On, the display ‘
Key
Lock On ’ appears on the screen if any button on
the front panel is pressed while viewing the TV.
• When another OSD is displayed, ‘
Key Lock
On ’ will not operate.
MHEG
On
Off
►
background
155
TELETEXT
TELETEXT
This feature is not available in all countries.
Press the TEXT button to switch to teletext. The initial page or last page
viewed appears on the screen.
Two page numbers, TV station name, date and time are displayed on the
screen headline. The first page number indicates your selection, while the sec-
ond shows the current page displayed.
Press the TEXT button to switch off teletext. The previous mode reappears.
SWITCH ON/OFF
■ Page selection
Enter the desired page number as a three digit number with the NUMBER buttons. If during selec-
tion you press a wrong number, you must complete the three digit number and then re-enter the
correct page number.
The P button can be used to select the preceding or following page.
SIMPLE TEXT
1
2
Teletext is a free service broadcast by most TV stations which gives up-to-the-
minute information on news, weather, television programmes, share prices and
many other topics.
The teletext decoder of this TV can support the SIMPLE, TOP and FASTEXT
systems. SIMPLE (standard teletext) consists of a number of pages which are
selected by directly entering the corresponding page number. TOP and
FASTEXT are more modern methods allowing quick and easy selection of
teletext information.
background
156
TELETEXT
TELETEXT
TOP TEXT
The user guide displays four fields-red, green, yellow and blue at the bottom of the screen. The yellow
field denotes the next group and the blue field indicates the next block.
■ Block / group / page selection
With the blue button you can progress from block to block.
Use the yellow button to proceed to the next group with automatic overflow to the next block.
With the green button you can proceed to the next existing page with automatic overflow to the next
group.
Alternatively the P button can be used.
The red button returns to the previous selection. Alternatively the P button can be used.
■ Direct page selection
As with SIMPLE teletext mode, you can select a page by entering it as a three digit number using
the NUMBER buttons in TOP mode.
4
1
2
3
FASTEXT
The teletext pages are colour coded along the bottom of the screen and are selected by pressing the
corresponding coloured button.
■ Page selection
Press the T.OPT button and then use button to select menu. Display the index page.
You can select the pages which are colour coded along the bottom line with corresponding
coloured buttons.
AS with SIMPLE teletext mode, you can select a page by entering its three digit page number with
the NUMBER buttons in FASTEXT mode.
The P button can be used to select the preceding or following page.
4
1
2
3
background
157
TELETEXT
SPECIAL TELETEXT FUNCTIONS
■ Index
Select the each index page.
■ Time
When viewing a TV programme, select this menu to display the time at the top right
hand corner of the screen.
In the teletext mode, press this button to select a sub page number. The sub page number is displayed at
the bottom of the screen. To hold or change the sub page, press the RED/GREEN,
< >
or NUMBER buttons.
■ Hold
Stops the automatic page change which will occur if a teletext page consists of 2 or more sub pages.
The number of sub pages and the sub page displayed is, usually, shown on the screen below the
time. When this menu is selected the stop symbol is displayed at the top left-hand corner of the
screen and the automatic page change is inactive.
■ Reveal
Select this menu to display concealed information, such as solutions to riddles or puzzles.
■ Update
Displays the TV picture on the screen while waiting for a new teletext page. The display will appear at
the top left hand corner of the screen. When the updated page is available then display will change to
the page number. Select this menu again to view the updated teletext page.
Press the T. OPT button and then use button to select the Text Option menu.
Text Option
Index
Time
Hold
Reveal
Update
Close
background
158
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING
The TV does not operate properly.
The remote control
does not work
■ Check to see if there is any object between the TV and the remote con-
trol causing an obstruction. Ensure you are pointing the remote control
directly at the TV.
■ Ensure that the batteries are installed with correct polarity (+ to +, - to -).
■ Install new batteries.
Power is suddenly
turned off
■ Is the sleep timer set?
■ Check the power control settings. Has the Power supply been interrupted.
■ If the TV is switched on and there is no input signal, it will switch off auto-
matically after 15 minutes.(Except for 32/37/42/47LD460C,
32/37/42/47/55LE750C, 32/37/42/47/55LE530C)
The video function does not work.
No picture & No sound
■ Check whether the TV is switched on.
■ Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.
■ Is the power cord inserted correctly into the mains?
■ Check your antenna direction and/or location.
■ Test the mains outlet by plugging another TV into the same outlet.
Picture appears slowly
after switching on
■ This is normal, the image is muted during the TV startup process. Please contact
your service centre, if the picture has not appeared after five minutes.
No or poor colour
or poor picture
■ Adjust Colour in menu option.
■ Allow a sufficient distance between the TV and the VCR.
■ Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.
■ Are the video cables installed properly?
■ Activate any function to restore the brightness of the picture.
Horizontal/vertical bars
or picture shaking
■ Check for local interference such as an electrical appliance or power tool.
Poor reception on
some channels
■ Station or cable channel experiencing problems, tune to another station.
■ Station signal is weak, reposition the antenna to receive weaker stations.
■ Check for sources of possible interference.
Lines or streaks
in pictures
■ Check antenna (Change the position of the antenna).
No picture
when connecting
HDMI
■ Check that your HDMI cable is High Speed HDMI Cable. If the HDMI cables are
not High Speed HDMI Cable, flickering or no screen display can result. Please
use the High Speed HDMI Cable.
background
159
APPENDIX
The audio function does not work.
Picture OK & No
sound
■ Press the + or - button.
■ Sound muted? Press MUTE button.
■ Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.
■ Are the audio cables installed properly?
No output from one
of the speakers
■ Adjust Balance in menu option.
Unusual sound from
inside the TV
■ A change in ambient humidity or temperature may result in an unusual noise
when the TV is switched on or off and does not indicate a fault with the TV.
No sound when con-
necting HDMI or USB
■ Check HDMI cable is High Speed HDMI Cable.
■ Check USB cable over version 2.0.
There is a problem in PC mode. (Only PC mode applied)
The signal is out of
range
(Invalid format)
■ Adjust resolution, horizontal frequency, or vertical frequency.
■ Check the input source.
Vertical bar or stripe on
background &
Horizontal Noise &
Incorrect position
■ Use Auto configure or adjust clock, phase, or H/V position. (Option)
Screen colour is
unstable or single
colour
■ Check the signal cable.
■ Reinstall the PC video card.
There is a problem with PICTURE settings.
When the user chang-
es the picture settings,
the TV automatically
converts back to the
initial settings after a
certain period of time.
■ It means that the TV is currently set to Store Demo mode.
To switch to Home use mode you should do the followings:
From the TV Menu, choose OPTION -> Choose Mode Setting -> Choose
Home use. Now, you have completed switching to the Home use mode.
*This feature is not available for all models.
background
160
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
MAINTENANCE
Early malfunctions can be prevented. Careful and regular cleaning can prolong the life of your new TV.
Caution: Be sure to switch the power off and unplug the power cord before you begin any cleaning.
Cleaning the Screen
A good way to keep the dust off your screen for a while is to wet a soft cloth in a mixture of luke-
warm water and a little fabric softener or dish washing detergent. Wring the cloth until it is
almost dry, and then use it to wipe the screen.
Ensure there is no excess water on the screen. Allow any water or dampness to evaporate
before switching on.
Cleaning the Cabinet
■ To remove dirt or dust, wipe the cabinet with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth.
■ Do not to use a wet cloth.
Extended Absence
2
1
CAUTION
► If you expect to leave your TV dormant for prolonged periods (such as a holiday), unplug the power cord to
protect against possible damage from lightning or power surges.
background
161
APPENDIX
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
MODELS
22LD3
**
22LD350-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
526.0 mm x 377.0 mm x 165 mm
without stand
526.0 mm x 331.0 mm x 65 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
4.3 kg
4.0 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
MODELS
26LD3
**
32LD3
**
26LD350-TA 32LD350-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
663.0 mm x 484.0 mm x 207 mm 800.0 mm x 565.0 mm x 207 mm
without stand
663.0 mm x 423.0 mm x 79.9 mm 800.0 mm x 509.0 mm x 73.8 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
7.3 kg
6.2 kg
9.2 kg
8.2 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
Environment condition
Operating
Temperature
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
-20 °C to 60 °C
Less than 85 %
background
162
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
MODELS
32LD4
**
37LD4
**
32LD460-TA
32LD461C-TA
32LD461F-TB
32LD460C-TA
32LD450-TA
37LD460-TA
37LD461C-TA
37LD461F-TB
37LD460C-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
799.0 mm x 555.0 mm x
207.0 mm
799.0 mm x 555.0 mm x
207.0 mm
916.0 mm x 625.0 mm x
261.0 mm
without stand
799.0 mm x 516 mm x 73.5
mm
799.0 mm x 506.0 mm x
73.5 mm
916.0 mm x 584 mm x
77.4 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
9.6 kg
8.6 kg
9.1 kg
8.1 kg
12.9 kg
11.2 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60
Hz
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60
Hz
MODELS
42LD4
**
47LD4
**
42LD460-TA
42LD461C-TA
42LD461F-TB
42LD460C-TA
42LD450-TA
47LD460-TA
47LD461C-TA
47LD461F-TB
47LD460C-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
1023.0 mm x 685.0 mm x
261.0 mm
1023.0 mm x 685.0 mm
x 261.0 mm
1136.0 mm x 757.0 mm x
270.0 mm
without stand
1023.0 mm x 644 mm x
76.6 mm
1023.0 mm x 635.0 mm
x 76.6 mm
1136.0 mm x 706 mm x
76.5 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
15.4 kg
13.7 kg
15.1 kg
13.5 kg
19.6 kg
17.6 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60
Hz
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60
Hz
Environment condition
Operating
Temperature
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
-20 °C to 60 °C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p.82 to 84
background
163
APPENDIX
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
MODELS
32LD5
**
42LD5
**
32LD550-TA
32LD560-TA
42LD550-TA
42LD560-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
800.0 mm x 563.0 mm x 207.0 mm 1024.0 mm x 695.0 mm x 261.0 mm
without stand
800.0 mm x 503.0 mm x 74.7 mm 1024.0 mm x 632.0 mm x 78.7 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
9.7 kg
8.7 kg
15.4 kg
13.8 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
MODELS
46LD5
**
52LD5
**
60LD5
**
46LD550-TA
52LD550-TA
52LD560-TA
60LD550-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
1115.0 mm x 752.0 mm x
270.0 mm
1266.0 mm x 851.0 mm x
330.0 mm
1441 mm x 963.0 mm x
345.0 mm
without stand
1115.0 mm x 680.0 mm x
77.0 mm
1266.0 mm x 775.0 mm x
96.4 mm
1441 mm x 877.0 mm x
109.0 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
18.6 kg
16.6 kg
26.9 kg
23.6 kg
40.0 kg
35.7 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60
Hz
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60
Hz
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60
Hz
Environment condition
Operating
Temperature
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
-20 °C to 60 °C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p.82 to 84
background
164
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
MODELS
32LD6
**
37LD6
**
32LD650-TA 37LD650-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
797.0 mm x 555.0 mm x 207.0 mm 916.0 mm x 625.0 mm x 261.0 mm
without stand
797.0 mm x 495.0 mm x 73.8 mm 916.0 mm x 560.0 mm x 77.7 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
9.8 kg
8.7 kg
12.8 kg
11.2 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
MODELS
42LD6
**
47LD6
**
55LD6
**
42LD650-TA 47LD650-TA 55LD650-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
1024.0 mm x 685.0 mm x
261.0 mm
1137.0 mm x 758.0 mm x
270.0 mm
1329.0 mm x 872.0 mm
x 330.0 mm
without stand
1024.0 mm x 621.0 mm x
76.8 mm
1137.0 mm x 685.0 mm x
76.8 mm
1329.0 mm x 796.0 mm
x 96.5 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
15.5 kg
13.9 kg
20.3 kg
18.3 kg
33.0 kg
29.8 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60
Hz
Environment condition
Operating
Temperature
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
-20 °C to 60 °C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p.82 to 84
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
background
165
APPENDIX
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
MODELS
32LE4
***
42LE4
***
32LE4600-TA 42LE4600-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
786 mm x 562 mm x 272 mm 1018 mm x 696 mm x 318 mm
without stand
786 mm x 500 mm x 39.9 mm 1018 mm x 627 mm x 29.8 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
14.5 kg
10.6 kg
21.9 kg
17.2 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
MODELS
47LE4
***
55LE4
***
47LE4600-TA 55LE4600-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
1128 mm x 759 mm x 318 mm 1311 mm x 866 mm x 330 mm
without stand
1128 mm x 693 mm x 29.8 mm 1311 mm x 798 mm x 31.4 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
24.9 kg
20.3 kg
36.6 kg
30.3 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
Environment condition
Operating
Temperature
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
-20 °C to 60 °C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p.82 to 84
background
166
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
MODELS
22LE5
***
26LE5
***
/ 26LE3
***
22LE5300-TA
22LE5310-TC
26LE5300-TA
26LE5310-TC
26LE3300-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
542.9 mm x 407.1 mm x 155.4 mm 652.0 mm x 480.8 mm x 191.4 mm
without stand
542.9 mm x 357.6 mm x 34.4 mm 652.0 mm x 420.3 mm x 34.4 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
4.2 kg
3.9 kg
6.1 kg
5.1 kg
Power requirement
DC 24 V, 1.7 A
AC-DC adaptor : 24 V , 3.42 A /
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
DC 24 V, 1.8 A
AC-DC adaptor : 24 V , 3.42 A /
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
MODELS
32LE5
***
32LE3
***
32LE5300-TA
32LE5310-TC
32LE530C-TA
32LE3300-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
784.6 mm x 558.1 mm x 221.0 mm 771.8 mm x 552.3 mm x 221.0 mm
without stand
784.6 mm x 499.5 mm x 39.9 mm 771.8 mm x 489.3 mm x 39.9 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
12.4 kg
10.5 kg
12.4 kg
10.5 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
Environment condition
Operating
Temperature
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
-20 °C to 60 °C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p.82 to 84
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
background
167
APPENDIX
MODELS
37LE5
***
42LE5
***
37LE5300-TA
37LE5310-TC
37LE530C-TA
42LE5300-TA
42LE5310-TC
42LE530C-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
905 mm x 630 mm x 270mm 1016.0 mm x 692.0 mm x 270.0 mm
without stand
905 mm x 568 mm x 39.9 mm 1016.0 mm x 630.0 mm x 29.3 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
15.3 kg
12.8 kg
19.2 kg
16.7 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
MODELS
47LE5
***
55LE5
***
47LE5300-TA
47LE5310-TC
47LE530C-TA
55LE5300-TA
55LE5310-TC
55LE530C-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
1126.6 mm x 757.9 mm x 284.4 mm 1306.0 mm x 867.0 mm x 328.0 mm
without stand
1126.6 mm x 692.0 mm x 29.3 mm 1306.0 mm x 797.0 mm x 30.7 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
22.6 kg
19.6 kg
34.0 kg
28.8 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
Environment condition
Operating
Temperature
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
-20 °C to 60 °C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p.82 to 84
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
background
168
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
MODELS
32LE5
***
37LE5
***
32LE5500-TA
32LE5510-TB
32LE551C-TA
37LE5500-TA
37LE5510-TB
37LE551C-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
784.6 mm x 558.1 mm x 221.0 mm 905 mm x 630 mm x 270mm
without stand
784.6 mm x 499.5 mm x 39.9 mm 905 mm x 568 mm x 39.9 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
12.7 kg
10.5 kg
15.6 kg
12.8 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60Hz
MODELS
42LE5
***
47LE5
***
42LE5500-TA
42LE5510-TB
42LE551C-TA
47LE5500-TA
47LE5510-TB
47LE551C-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
1016.0 mm x 692.0 mm x 270.0 mm 1126.6 mm x 757.9 mm x 284.4 mm
without stand
1016.0 mm x 630.0 mm x 29.3 mm 1126.6 mm x 692.0 mm x 29.3 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
19.5 kg
16.7 kg
22.9 kg
19.6 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60Hz
Environment condition
Operating
Temperature
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
-20 °C to 60 °C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p.82 to 84
background
169
APPENDIX
MODELS
55LE5
***
55LE5500-TA
55LE5510-TB
55LE551C-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
1306.0 mm x 867.0 mm x 328.0 mm
without stand
1306.0 mm x 797.0 mm x 30.7 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
34.5 kg
28.8 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
MODELS
22LE6
***
26LE6
***
22LE6500-TA 26LE6500-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
533.0 mm x 400.0 mm x 187.0 mm 650.0 mm x 469.0 mm x 187.0 mm
without stand
533.0 mm x 349.0 mm x 39.9 mm 650.0 mm x 418.0 mm x 39.9 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
3.4 kg
3.1 kg
4.9 kg
4.6 kg
Power requirement
DC 24 V, 1.7 A
AC-DC adaptor : 24 V , 3.42 A /
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
DC 24 V, 2.1 A
AC-DC adaptor : 24 V , 3.42 A /
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
Environment condition
Operating
Temperature
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
-20 °C to 60 °C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p.82 to 84
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
background
170
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
MODELS
32LE7
***
37LE7
***
32LE7500-TA
32LE750C-TA
37LE7500-TA
37LE750C-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
786.4 mm x 557.6 mm x 221.0 mm 907.4 mm x 629.3 mm x 269.8 mm
without stand
786.4 mm x 500.4 mm x 39.9 mm 907.4 mm x 569.0 mm x 39.9 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
13.9 kg
11.7 kg
17.5 kg
14.7 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60Hz
MODELS
42LE7
***
47LE7
***
55LE7
***
42LE7500-TA
42LE750C-TA
47LE7500-TA
47LE750C-TA
55LE7500-TA
55LE750C-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
1018.2 mm x 693.5 mm x
269.8 mm
1128.6 mm x 758.9 mm x
284.4 mm
1306.0 mm x 869 mm x
328.0 mm
without stand
1018.2 mm x 630.7 mm x
29.3 mm
1128.6 mm x 693.3 mm x
29.8 mm
1306.0 mm x 797.4 mm
x 31.2 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
21.9 kg
19.1 kg
26.2 kg
23.0 kg
39.1 kg
33.5 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60Hz
AC 100-240 V~ 50 /
60Hz
Environment condition
Operating
Temperature
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
-20 °C to 60 °C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p.82 to 84
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
background
171
APPENDIX
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
MODELS
42LE8
***
47LE8
***
42LE8500-TA 47LE8500-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
1013.3 mm x 705.8 mm x 235.5 mm 1122.6 mm x 769.3 mm x 275.0 mm
without stand
1013.3 mm x 645.8 mm x 34.5 mm 1122.6 mm x 707.3 mm x 34.5 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
27.2 kg
23.1 kg
31.6 kg
27.0 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60Hz
MODELS
55LE8
***
55LE8500-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
1292.6 mm x 875.4 mm x 311.9 mm
without stand
1292.6 mm x 802.9 mm x 34.5 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
43.8 kg
35.8 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60Hz
Environment condition
Operating
Temperature
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
-20 °C to 60 °C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p.82 to 84
background
172
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
MODELS
32LE4
***
42LE4
***
32LE4500-TA 42LE4500-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
786.0 mm x 559.0 mm x 221.0 mm 1018.0 mm x 692.0 mm x 270.0 mm
without stand
786.0 mm x 500.0 mm x 39.9 mm 1018.0 mm x 627.0 mm x 29.8 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
12.4 kg
10.6 kg
19.7 kg
17.2 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60Hz
Environment condition
Operating
Temperature
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
-20 °C to 60 °C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p.82 to 84
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
background
173
APPENDIX
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
MODELS
47LX9*** 55LX9***
47LX9500-TA 55LX9500-TA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
1085.9 mm x 710.6 mm x 255.0 mm 1255.8 mm x 805.0 mm x 255.0 mm
without stand
1085.9 mm x 654.2 mm x 31.6 mm 1255.8 mm x 749.6 mm x 31.6 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
26.7 kg
22.1 kg
32.7 kg
28.1 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
MODELS
42LX6*** 47LX6*** 55LX6***
42LX6500-TD 47LX6500-TD 55LX6500-TD
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
with stand
1016.0 mm x 692.0 mm x
270.0 mm
1126.6 mm x 757.9 mm x
284.4 mm
1306.0 mm x 867.0 mm x
328.0 mm
without stand
1016.0 mm x 630.0 mm x
29.3 mm
1126.6 mm x 692.0 mm x
29.3 mm
1306.0 mm x 797.0 mm x
30.7 mm
Weight
with stand
without stand
19.5 kg
16.7 kg
22.9 kg
19.6 kg
34.5 kg
28.8 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60
Hz
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60
Hz
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60
Hz
Environment condition
Operating
Temperature
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
-20 °C to 60 °C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p.82 to 84
background
174
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
Digital TV Analogue TV
New Zealand, Singapore
Television System
DVB-T PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K
, PAL-I
Program Coverage
UHF 21 to 69
BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
Australia Television System
DVB-T PAL B/B
Program Coverage
VHF 06 to 12,
UHF 27 to 69
B/B : VHF/UHF 0 to 75, CATV : 2 to 44
Indonesia, Israel Television System
DVB-T PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K
, PAL-I, NTSC-M
Program Coverage
UHF 21 to 69
BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71
South Africa Television System
DVB-T PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K
, PAL-I, NTSC-M
Program Coverage
VHF 4 to 11, 13
UHF 21 to 68
BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71
Veitnam, Malaysia Television System
DVB-T PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K
, PAL-I, NTSC-M
Program Coverage
VHF 6 to 12,
UHF 21 to 69
BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71
Iran Television System
DVB-T PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K
, PAL-I, NTSC-M
Program Coverage
VHF 5 to 12,
UHF 21 to 69
BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71
Analogue model
Television System
-
PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K
, PAL-I, NTSC-M
Program Coverage
-
BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71
External Antenna
Impedance
75 Ω 75 Ω
background
175
APPENDIX
IR CODES
This feature is not available for all models.
Code (Hexa) Function Note
95 Energy Saving R/C BUTTON
08 POWER R/C BUTTON(POWER ON/OFF)
0B INPUT R/C BUTTON
79 RATIO R/C BUTTON
F0 TV/RAD R/C BUTTON
45 Q.MENU R/C BUTTON
43 MENU R/C BUTTON
AB GUIDE R/C BUTTON
40
Up (ꕌ)
R/C BUTTON
41
Down (ꕍ)
R/C BUTTON
07
Left (
<
)
R/C BUTTON
06
Right (
>
)
R/C BUTTON
44
OK(ꔉ)
R/C BUTTON
28 BACK R/C BUTTON
5B EXIT R/C BUTTON
AA INFO i R/C BUTTON
30 AV MODE R/C BUTTON
02
+
R/C BUTTON
03
-
R/C BUTTON
1E FAV/MARK/CHAR/NUM R/C BUTTON
09 MUTE/DELETE R/C BUTTON
00
P ꕌ / PAGE ꕌ
R/C BUTTON
01
P ꕍ /PAGE ꕍ
R/C BUTTON
10~19 Number Key 0~9 R/C BUTTON
53 LIST R/C BUTTON
1A Q.VIEW R/C BUTTON
72 RED Key R/C BUTTON
71 GREEN Key R/C BUTTON
63 YELLOW Key R/C BUTTON
61 BLUE Key/(L/R SELECT) R/C BUTTON
20 TEXT R/C BUTTON
21 T.OPT(T.Option) R/C BUTTON
39 SUBTITLE R/C BUTTON
7E SIMPLINK R/C BUTTON
91 AD R/C BUTTON
0F TV R/C BUTTON
7C X-STUDIO R/C BUTTON
59 NetCast R/C BUTTON
B1
▀
R/C BUTTON
B0
►
R/C BUTTON
BA
l l
R/C BUTTON
8F
◄◄
R/C BUTTON
8E
►►
R/C BUTTON
DC 3D R/C BUTTON
2E FAMILY R/C BUTTON
3A CRICKET R/C BUTTON
background
176
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
RS-232C Setup
Connect the RS-232C (serial port) input jack to an
external control device (such as a computer or an
A/V control system) to control the product’s func-
tions externally.
Connect the serial port of the control device to the
RS-232C jack on the product back panel.
Note: RS-232C connection cables are not supplied
with the product.
1 5
6 9
RS-232C Configurations
7-Wire Configurations
(
Standard RS-232C cable
)
PC TV
RXD 2 3 TXD
TXD 3 2 RXD
GND 5 5 GND
DTR 4 6 DSR
DSR 6 4 DTR
RTS 7 8 CTS
CTS 8 7 RTS
D-Sub 9 D-Sub 9
3-Wire Configurations
(
Not standard
)
PC TV
RXD 2 3 TXD
TXD 3 2 RXD
GND 5 5 GND
DTR 4 6 DTR
DSR 6 4 DSR
RTS 7 7 RTS
CTS 8 8 CTS
D-Sub 9 D-Sub 9
Type of Connector; D-Sub 9-Pin Male
No. Pin Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
No connection
RXD
(
Receive data
)
TXD
(
Transmit data
)
DTR
(
DTE side ready
)
GND
DSR
(
DCE side ready
)
RTS
(
Ready to send
)
CTS
(
Clear to send
)
No Connection
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
COMPONENT IN
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
/DVI IN
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
/DVI IN
IN 3
H/P
AV IN2
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN
(PC)
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AV IN2
IN 3
H/P
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
/DVI IN
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
1
2
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
R
L/MONO
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
AV IN1
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
background
177
APPENDIX
● Language(Language)
● Country : Australia
● Hard of Hearing (ꔞ) : Off
● Power Indicator
● Factory Reset
● Set ID : 1
● Mode Setting : Home Use
● IR Blaster : Off
OK
Move
OPTION
● Set ID :1
Set ID
Use this function to specify a set ID number.
Refer to ‘Real Data Mapping’.
►
p.182
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
◄
1
►
Close
1
Select OPTION.
2
Select Set ID.
3
Adjust Set ID to choose the desired TV ID number.
The adjustment range of SET ID is 1 to 99.
● Language(Language)
● Country : Australia
● Hard of Hearing (ꔞ) : Off
● Power Indicator
● Factory Reset
● Set ID : 1
● Mode Setting : Home Use
● IR Blaster : Off
OK
Move
OPTION
● Set ID :1
►
►
background
178
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
Communication Parameters
■ Baud rate : 9600 bps
(
UART
)
■ Data length : 8 bits
■ Parity : None
■ Stop bit : 1 bit
■ Communication code : ASCII code
■ Use a crossed (reverse) cable.
Transmission
*
[Command 1] : First command to control the TV.
(j, k, m or x)
*
[Command 2] : Second command to control the TV.
*
[Set ID] : You can adjust the set ID to choose
desired monitor ID number in option
menu. Adjustment range is 1 to 99.
When selecting Set ID ‘0’, every con-
nected set is controlled.
Set ID is indicated as decimal (1 to 99)
on menu and as Hexa decimal (0x1 to
0x63) on transmission/receiving proto-
col.
*
[DATA] : To transmit command data.
Transmit ‘FF’ data to read status of com-
mand.
*
[Cr] : Carriage Return
ASCII code ‘0x0D’
*
[ ] : ASCII code ‘space (0x20)’
[Command1][Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
OK Acknowledgement
* The set transmits ACK (acknowledgement) based
on this format when receiving normal data. At this
time, if the data is data read mode, it indicates
present status data. If the data is data write mode,
it returns the data of the PC computer.
[Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][OK][Data][x]
Error Acknowledgement
* The set transmits ACK (acknowledgement) based
on this format when receiving abnormal data from
non-viable functions or communication errors.
[Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][NG][Data][x]
Transmission / Receiving Protocol
Command Reference List
Data 00: Illegal Code
* Note : During USB operations such as DivX or EMF, all
commands except Power(ka) and Key(mc) are not exe-
cuted and treated as NG.
COMMAND
1
COMMAND
2
DATA
(Hexadecimal)
01. Power k a 00 to 01
02. Aspect Ratio k c Refer to p. 179
03. Screen Mute k d Refer to p. 179
04. Volume Mute k e 00 to 01
05. Volume Control k f 00 to 64
06. Contrast k g 00 to 64
07. Brightness k h 00 to 64
08. Colour k i 00 to 64
09. Tint k j 00 to 64
10. Sharpness k k 00 to 64
11. OSD Select k l 00 to 01
12.
Remote control lock mode
k m 00 to 01
13. Treble k r 00 to 64
14.
Bass
k s 00 to 64
15. Balance k t 00 to 64
16.
Colour Temperature
x u 00 to 64
17. Energy Saving j q 00 to 05
18. Auto Configuration j u 01
19. Tune Command m a Refer to p. 181
20. Programme Add/Skip m b 00 to 01
21. Key m c Key Code
22. Control Back Light m g 00 to 64
23. Input select (Main) x b Refer to p. 182
background
179
APPENDIX
08. Colour (Command: k i)
► To adjust the screen colour.
You can also adjust colour in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
*
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 182.
[k][i][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Ack
[i][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
04. Volume Mute (Command: k e)
► To control volume mute on/off.
You can also adjust mute using the MUTE button on
remote control.
Transmission
Data 00 : Volume mute on (Volume off)
01 : Volume mute off (Volume on)
[k][e][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Ack
[e][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
02. Aspect Ratio (
Command: k
c) (Main Picture Size)
► To adjust the screen format. (Main picture format)
You can also adjust the screen format using the
Aspect Ratio in the Q.MENU. or PICTURE menu.
Transmission
Data 01 : Normal screen (4:3)
02 : Wide screen (16:9)
04 : Zoom
06 : Original
07 : 14:9
09 : Just Scan
0B : Full Wide
10 to 1F : Cinema Zoom 1 to 16
[k][c][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Ack
* Using the PC input, you select either 16:9 or 4:3
screen aspect ratio.
*
In DTV/HDMI (1080i 50 Hz / 60 Hz, 720p 50Hz /
60 Hz, 1080p 24 Hz / 30 Hz / 50 Hz / 60 Hz),
Component( 720p, 1080i, 1080p 50 Hz / 60 Hz)
mode, Just Scan is available.
* Full Wide is supported only f
or DTV mode
.
[c][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
03. Screen Mute (Command: k d)
► To select screen mute on/off.
Transmission
Data 00 : Screen mute off (Picture on)
Video mute off
01 : Screen mute on (Picture off)
10 : Video mute on
* In case of video mute on only, TV will display On
Screen Display(OSD). But, in case of Screen mute
on, TV will not display OSD.
[k][d][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Ack
[d][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
05. Volume Control (Command: k f)
► To adjust volume.
You can also adjust volume with the VOLUME but-
tons on remote control.
Transmission
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
*
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 182.
[k][f][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Ack
[f][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
06. Contrast (Command: k g)
► To adjust screen contrast.
You can also adjust contrast in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
*
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 182.
[k][g][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
[g][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
07. Brightness (Command: k h)
► To adjust screen brightness.
You can also adjust brightness in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
*
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 182.
[k][h][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Ack
[h][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
01. Power (Command: k a)
► To control Power On/Off of the set.
Transmission
Data 00 : Power Off 01 : Power On
[k][a][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Ack
[a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
► To show Power On/Off.
Transmission
[k][a][ ][Set ID][ ][FF][Cr]
Ack
* Similarly, if other functions transmit ‘0xFF’ data
based on this format, Acknowledgement data feed
back presents status about each function.
* OK Ack., Error Ack. and other message may dis-
play on the screen when TV is power On.
[a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Ack
background
180
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
12. Remote control lock mode (Command: k m)
► To lock the front panel controls on the monitor and
remote control.
Transmission
[k][m][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Ack
Data 00 : Lock off 01 : Lock on
* If you are not using the remote control, use this
mode.
When main power is on/off, external control lock is
released.
* In the standby mode, if key lock is on, TV will not
turn on by power on key of IR & Local Key.
[m][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
11. OSD Select (Command: k l)
► To select OSD (On Screen Display) on/off when con-
trolling remotely.
Transmission
[k][l][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Ack
Data 00 : OSD off 01 : OSD on
[l][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
09. Tint (Command: k j)
► To adjust the screen tint.
You can also adjust tint in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission
Data Red : 00 to Green : 64
*
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 182.
[k][j][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Ack
[j][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
► To adjust the screen sharpness.
You can also adjust sharpness in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission
10. Sharpness (Command: k k)
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
*
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 182.
[k][k][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Ack
[k][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
15. Balance (Command: k t)
► To adjust balance.
You can also adjust balance in the AUDIO menu.
Transmission
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
*
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 182.
[k][t][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Ack
[t][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
14.
Bass (Command: k s)
► To adjust bass.
You can also adjust bass in the AUDIO menu.
Transmission
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
*
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 182.
[k][s][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Ack
[s][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
13. Treble (Command: k r)
► To adjust treble.
You can also adjust treble in the AUDIO menu.
Transmission
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
*
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 182.
[k][r][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Ack
[r][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
16. Colour Temperature (Command: x u)
► To adjust colour temperature. You can also adjust Colour
Temperature in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
*
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 182.
[x][u][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Ack
[u][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
background
181
APPENDIX
17. Energy Saving (Command: j q)
► To reduce the power consumption of the TV. You can
also adjust Energy Saving in PICTURE menu.
Transmission
[j][q][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Ack
[q][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
18. Auto Configure(Command: j u)
► To adjust picture position and minimize image shaking
automatically. It works only in RGB (PC) mode.
Transmission
Data 01: To set
[j][u][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Ack
[u][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Power Saving
Function
Level
Description
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 Low Power 0 0 0 0 Off
0 0 0 0 Low Power 0 0 0 1 Minimum
0 0 0 0 Low Power 0 0 1 0 Medium
0 0 0 0 Low Power 0 0 1 1 Maximum
0 0 0 0 Low Power 0 1 0 0
Auto
0 0 0 0 Low Power 0 1 0 1 Screen Off
19.Tune Command (Command: m a)
► Select channel to following physical number.
Transmission
Data00 : High channel data
Data01 : Low channel data
ex. No. 47 -> 00 2F (2FH)
No. 394 -> 01 8A (18AH),
DTV No. 0 -> Don’t care
Data02 : 0x00 :
Analogue
Main
0x10 : DTV Main
0x20 : Radio
Channel data range
Analogue - Min: 00 to Max: 63 (0 to 99)
Digital - Min: 00 to Max: 3E7 (0 to 999)
[m][a][ ][Set ID][ ][Data0][ ][Data1][ ][Data2][Cr]
Ack
[a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Data Min: 00 to Max: 7DH
20. Programme Add/Skip(Command: m b)
► To set skip status for the current Programme.
Transmission
Data 00 : Skip 01 : Add
[m][b][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Ack
[b][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Except 22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LD4**,
19/22/26LE5***, 22/26LE6***, 26LE3***
background
182
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
*
Real data mapping 1
00 : Step 0
A : Step 10 (Set ID 10)
F : Step 15 (Set ID 15)
10 : Step 16 (Set ID 16)
64 : Step 100
6E : Step 110
73 : Step 115
74 : Step 116
CF : Step 199
FE : Step 254
FF : Step 255
23
. Input select (
Command: x
b)
(Main Picture Input)
► To select input source for main picture.
Transmission
Data Structure
MSB LSB
[x][b][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
External Input Input Number
22. Control Back Light (Command: m g)
► To Control the back light.
Transmission
[m][g][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Ack
[g][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Data : data Min: 00 to Max: 64
21. Key(Command: m c)
► To send IR remote key code.
Transmission
Data Key code - Refer to page 175.
[m][c][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Ack
[c][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Ack
[b][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
External Input Data
0 0 0 0
DTV
0 0 0 1
Analogue
0 0 1 0
AV
0 1 0 0
Component
0 1 1 0
RGB
0 1 1 1
HDMI
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
Input Number Data
0 0 0 0
Input1
0 0 0 1
Input2
0 0 1 0
Input3
0 0 1 1
Input4
background
183
APPENDIX
OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE NOTICE
(Except 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**, 32/37/42/47/55LE55**, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***,
42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***)
The following GPL executables and LGPL, MPL libraries used in this product are subject to the
GPL2.0/LGPL2.1/MPL1.1 License Agreements:
GPL EXECUTABLES:
• Linux kernel 2.6, busybox, e2fsprogs, gdbserver, jfsutils, mtd-utils, procps, u-boot, udhcpc
LGPL LIBRARIES:
• cairo, directFB, gettext, glib, glibc, iconv, pixman
MPL LIBRARIES:
• Nanox
LG Electronics offers to provide source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge covering the cost of
performing such distribution, such as the cost of media, shipping and handling upon e-mail request
to LG Electronics at: [email protected]
This offer is valid for a period of three (3) years from the date of the distribution of this product by
LG Electronics.
You can obtain a copy of the GPL, LGPL and MPL licenses on the CD-ROM provided with this prod-
uct. Also you can obtain the translation of GPL, LGPL licenses from http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-
licenses/gpl-2.0-translations.html, http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1-translations.html.
This product includes
• expat:
■ copyright © 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper
■ copyright © 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers.
• freetype: copyright © 2003 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org).
• ICU: copyright © 1995-2008 International Business Machines Corporation and others
• libcurl: copyright © 1996 - 2008, Daniel Stenberg.
• libjpeg: This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group copyright ©
1991 – 1998, Thomas G. Lane.
• libmng: copyright © 2000-2007 Gerard Juyn, Glenn Randers-Pehrson
• libpng: copyright © 1998-2008 Glenn Randers-Pehrson
• md5: copyright © 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc
• md5 checksum : copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002 Aladdin Enterprises
• ncurses: copyright © 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
• openSSL:
■ cryptographic software written by Eric Young.
■ software written by Tim Hudson.
■ software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.
openssl.org)
• strace :
■ copyright © 1991, 1992 Paul Kranenburg.
■ copyright © 1993 Branko Lankester.
■ copyright © 1993 Ulrich Pegelow.
■ copyright © 1995, 1996 Michael Elizabeth Chastain.
background
184
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
■ copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996 Rick Sladkey.
■ copyright © 1998-2003 Wichert Akkerman.
■ copyright © 2002-2008 Roland McGrath.
■ copyright © 2003-2008 Dmitry V. Levin.
■ copyright © 2007-2008 Jan Kratochvil.
• tinyxml: copyright © 2000-2006 Lee Thomason
• xyssl: Copyright (C) 2009 Paul Bakker
• zlib: copyright © 1995-2005 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
All rights reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, includ-
ing without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, sub-
ject to the following conditions:
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
background
185
APPENDIX
(Only 32/42/52LD56*, 32/37/42/47/55LD6**, 32/37/42/47/55LE55
*
*, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***,
42/47/55LX6***, 47/55LX9***)
The following GPL executables and LGPL, MPL libraries used in this product are subject to the
GPL2.0/LGPL2.1/MPL1.1 License Agreements:
GPL EXECUTABLES:
Linux kernel 2.6, busybox, e2fsprogs, jfsutils, lzo, msdl-1.1, mtd-utils, ntpclient, procps
LGPL LIBRARIES:
Atk, cairo, directFB, ffmpeg, glib, GnuTLS, gtk+, iconv, libintl, libgcrypt, libgpg-error, libsoup, libusb,
pango, uClibc, webkit
MPL LIBRARIES:
Nanox, spidermonkey
LG Electronics offers to provide source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge covering the cost of
performing such distribution, such as the cost of media, shipping and handling upon e-mail request
to LG Electronics : [email protected]
This offer is valid for a period of three (3) years from the date of the distribution of this product by
LG Electronics.
You can obtain a copy of the GPL, LGPL, MPL licenses on the CD-ROM provided with this prod-
uct.
Also you can obtain the translation of GPL, LGPL licenses from
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0-translations.html,
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1-translations.html.
This product includes other open source software.
■ boost C++: software developed by http://www.boost.org distributed under the Boost Software
License, Version 1.0
■ c-ares : copyright © 1998 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology
■ expat:
•copyright © 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper
•copyright © 2001-2007 Expat maintainers.
■ fontconfig: copyright © 2001, 2003 Keith Packard
■ freetype: copyright © 2003 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org).
■ ICU: copyright © 1995-2008 International Business Machines Corporation and others.
■ libcurl: copyright © 1996 - 2008, Daniel Stenberg.
■ libjpeg: This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group copyright
© 1991 – 1998, Thomas G. Lane.
■ libmng: copyright © 2000-2007 Gerard Juyn, Glenn Randers-Pehrson
■ libpng: copyright © 1998-2008 Glenn Randers-Pehrson
■ libupnp: copyright © 2000-2003 Intel Corporation
■ libxml2 : copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard
■ libxslt: copyright © 2001-2002 Daniel Veillard
■ lua interpreter: copyright © 1994–2008 Lua.org, PUC-Rio
■ md5: copyright © 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc
■ openSSL:
•cryptographic software written by Eric Young.
background
186
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
• software written by Tim Hudson.
• software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.opens-
sl.org)
■ pixman:
•copyright © 1987, 1988, 1989, 1998 The Open Group
•copyright © 1987, 1988, 1989 Digital Equipment Corporation
•copyright © 1999, 2004, 2008 Keith Packard
•copyright © 2000 SuSE, Inc.
•copyright © 2000 Keith Packard, member of The XFree86 Project, Inc.
•copyright © 2004, 2005, 2007, 2008 Red Hat, Inc.
•copyright © 2004 Nicholas Miell
•copyright © 2005 Lars Knoll & Zack Rusin, Trolltech
•copyright © 2005 Trolltech AS
•copyright © 2007 Luca Barbato
•copyright © 2008 Aaron Plattner, NVIDIA Corporation
•copyright © 2008 Rodrigo Kumpera
•copyright © 2008 André Tupinambá
•copyright © 2008 Mozilla Corporation
•copyright © 2008 Frederic Plourde
■ portmap: copyright © 1983,1991 The Regents of the University of California.
■ tiff: copyright © 1987, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
■ tinyxml: copyright © 2000-2006 Lee Thomason
■ xyssl:
•copyright © 2006-2008 Christophe Devine
•copyright © 2009 Paul Bakker
■ zlib: copyright © 1995-2005 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
All rights reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, includ-
ing without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, sub-
ject to the following conditions:
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
background
187
APPENDIX
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU
General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free
Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License
instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to
make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or
use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to sur-
render the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software,
or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all
the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show
them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal
permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no war-
ranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not
reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors
of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we
have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it
may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program
or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that
is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is
addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope.
The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running
the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
background
188
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, pro-
vided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of
any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in
exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program,
and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all
of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any
change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the
Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this
License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running
for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copy-
right notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may
redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception:
if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the
Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the
Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its
terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regard-
less of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the
intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on
the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this
License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable
form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under
the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than
your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding
source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This
alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or exe-
cutable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable
work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface defini-
tion files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special excep-
tion, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs,
unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
background
189
APPENDIX
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering
equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though
third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License.
Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate
your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will
not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permis-
sion to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not
accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indi-
cate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the
Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a
license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You
may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible
for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to
patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the con-
ditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to sat-
isfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the
Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it
and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the sec-
tion is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest
validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution
system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide
range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the
author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical
distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to
time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems
or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which
applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different,
write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to
the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software
generally.
background
190
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN
WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),
EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve
this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most
effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to
where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General
Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO
WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain
conditions; type `show c' for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License.
Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer"
for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compil-
ers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a
subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is
what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.
background
191
APPENDIX
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301
USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not
allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public
License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU
General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the
software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically
libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest
you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in
any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you
wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of
it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to
surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the
library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the
rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code
with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library
after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which
gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the
library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original
version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a
company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder.
Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom
of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license,
the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary
General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free
programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is
legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore
permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits
more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the
ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing
non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many
libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library,
so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more
frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to
gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use
a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many
more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
background
192
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a
program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified ver-
sion of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the differ-
ence between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from
the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public
License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with applica-
tion programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A
"work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work
containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete
source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus
the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope.
The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its
contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether
that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medi-
um, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and dis-
claimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distrib-
ute a copy of this License along with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection
in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library,
and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all
of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of
any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this
License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program
that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good
faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates,
and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of
the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function
must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the
Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its
terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regard-
less of who wrote it.
background
193
APPENDIX
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the
intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the
Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy
of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU
General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU
General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other
change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License
applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or execut-
able form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding
machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even
though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being
compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of
the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library
(because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore cov-
ered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the
work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.
Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library.
The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and
small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it
is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under
Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of
Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with
the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library
to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that
the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modi-
fications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its
use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copy-
right notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the
user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including
whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work
is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object
code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable
containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the
Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at
run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions
into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as
long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.
background
194
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials
specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to
copy the above specified materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs
needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need
not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler,
kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normal-
ly accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in
an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with
other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate
distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that
you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other
library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and
explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this
License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automati-
cally terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permis-
sion to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept
this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your
acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or
works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a
license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and condi-
tions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to
patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the con-
ditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to sat-
isfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the
Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and
this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the sec-
tion is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest
validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution
system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide
range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the
author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical dis-
tribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
background
195
APPENDIX
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from
time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new prob-
lems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which
applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number,
you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible
with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,
write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two
goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO
THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED
ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it
free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or,
alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file
to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer
to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General
Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any
later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public
License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer"
for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by
James Random Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
background
196
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 1.1
---------------
1. Definitions.
1.0.1. "Commercial Use" means distribution or otherwise making the Covered Code available to a third party.
1.1. "Contributor" means each entity that creates or contributes to the creation of Modifications.
1.2. "Contributor Version" means the combination of the Original Code, prior Modifications used by a Contributor,
and the Modifications made by that particular Contributor.
1.3. "Covered Code" means the Original Code or Modifications or the combination of the Original Code and
Modifications, in each case including portions thereof.
1.4. "Electronic Distribution Mechanism" means a mechanism generally accepted in the software development com-
munity for the electronic transfer of data.
1.5. "Executable" means Covered Code in any form other than Source Code.
1.6. "Initial Developer" means the individual or entity identified as the Initial Developer in the Source Code notice
required by Exhibit A.
1.7. "Larger Work" means a work which combines Covered Code or portions thereof with code not governed by the
terms of this License.
1.8. "License" means this document.
1.8.1. "Licensable" means having the right to grant, to the maximum extent possible, whether at the time of the ini-
tial grant or subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights conveyed herein.
1.9. "Modifications" means any addition to or deletion from the substance or structure of either the Original Code or
any previous Modifications. When Covered Code is released as a series of files, a Modification is:
A. Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a file containing Original Code or previous Modifications.
B. Any new file that contains any part of the Original Code or previous Modifications.
1.10. "Original Code" means Source Code of computer software code which is described in the Source Code notice
required by Exhibit A as Original Code, and which, at the time of its release under this License is not already
Covered Code governed by this License.
1.10.1. "Patent Claims" means any patent claim(s), now owned or hereafter acquired, including without limitation,
method, process, and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable by grantor.
1.11. "Source Code" means the preferred form of the Covered Code for making modifications to it, including all
modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, scripts used to control compilation and installation
of an Executable, or source code differential comparisons against either the Original Code or another well known,
available Covered Code of the Contributor's choice. The Source Code can be in a compressed or archival form,
provided the appropriate decompression or de-archiving software is widely available for no charge.
1.12. "You" (or "Your") means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under, and complying with all of the
terms of, this License or a future version of this License issued under Section 6.1.
For legal entities, "You" includes any entity which controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with You.
For purposes of this definition, "control" means (a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or manage-
ment of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than fifty percent (50%) of the out-
standing shares or beneficial ownership of such entity.
2. Source Code License.
2.1. The Initial Developer Grant.
The Initial Developer hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license, subject to third party intel-
lectual property claims:
(a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Initial Developer to use,
reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Original Code (or portions thereof) with or
without Modifications, and/or as part of a Larger Work; and
background
197
APPENDIX
(b) under Patents Claims infringed by the making, using or selling of Original Code, to make, have made, use,
practice, sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise dispose of the Original Code (or portions thereof).
(c) the licenses granted in this Section 2.1(a) and (b) are effective on the date Initial Developer first distributes
Original Code under the terms of this License.
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above, no patent license is granted: 1) for code that You delete from the
Original Code; 2) separate from the Original Code; or 3) for infringements caused by: i) the modification of the
Original Code or ii) the combination of the Original Code with other software or devices.
2.2. Contributor Grant.
Subject to third party intellectual property claims, each Contributor hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free,
non-exclusive license
(a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Contributor, to use, repro-
duce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Modifications created by such Contributor (or por-
tions thereof) either on an unmodified basis, with other Modifications, as Covered Code and/or as part of a
Larger Work; and
(b) under Patent Claims infringed by the making, using, or selling of Modifications made by that Contributor
either alone and/or in combination with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination), to make, use,
sell, offer for sale, have made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1) Modifications made by that Contributor (or portions
thereof); and 2) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with its Contributor Version (or por-
tions of such combination).
(c) the licenses granted in Sections 2.2(a) and 2.2(b) are effective on the date Contributor first makes
Commercial Use of the Covered Code.
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2(b) above, no patent license is granted: 1) for any code that Contributor has delet-
ed from the Contributor Version; 2) separate from the Contributor Version; 3) for infringements caused by: i)
third party modifications of Contributor Version or ii) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor
with other software (except as part of the Contributor Version) or other devices; or 4) under Patent Claims
infringed by Covered Code in the absence of Modifications made by that Contributor.
3. Distribution Obligations.
3.1. Application of License.
The Modifications which You create or to which You contribute are governed by the terms of this License, including
without limitation Section 2.2. The Source Code version of Covered Code may be distributed only under the terms of
this License or a future version of this License released under Section 6.1, and You must include a copy of this
License with every copy of the Source Code You distribute. You may not offer or impose any terms on any Source
Code version that alters or restricts the applicable version of this License or the recipients' rights hereunder.
However, You may include an additional document offering the additional rights described in Section 3.5.
3.2. Availability of Source Code.
Any Modification which You create or to which You contribute must be made available in Source Code form under
the terms of this License either on the same media as an Executable version or via an accepted Electronic
Distribution Mechanism to anyone to whom you made an Executable version available; and if made available via
Electronic Distribution Mechanism, must remain available for at least twelve (12) months after the date it initially
became available, or at least six (6) months after a subsequent version of that particular Modification has been
made available to such recipients. You are responsible for ensuring that the Source Code version remains available
even if the
Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained by a third party.
3.3. Description of Modifications.
You must cause all Covered Code to which You contribute to contain a file documenting the changes You made to
create that Covered Code and the date of any change. You must include a prominent statement that the Modification
is derived, directly or indirectly, from Original Code provided by the Initial Developer and including the name of the
Initial Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b) in any notice in an Executable version or related documentation in
which You describe the origin or ownership of the Covered Code.
3.4. Intellectual Property Matters
(a) Third Party Claims.
If Contributor has knowledge that a license under a third party's intellectual property rights is required to exercise
the rights granted by such Contributor under Sections 2.1 or 2.2, Contributor must include a text file with the
Source Code distribution titled "LEGAL" which describes the claim and the party making the claim in sufficient
detail that a recipient will know whom to contact. If Contributor obtains such knowledge after the Modification is
made available as described in Section 3.2, Contributor shall promptly modify the LEGAL file in all copies
Contributor makes available thereafter and shall take other steps (such as notifying appropriate mailing lists or
newsgroups) reasonably calculated to inform those who received the Covered Code that new knowledge has
been obtained.
background
198
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
(b) Contributor APIs.
If Contributor's Modifications include an application programming interface and Contributor has knowledge of
patent licenses which are reasonably necessary to implement that API, Contributor must also include this infor-
mation in the LEGAL file.
(c) Representations.
Contributor represents that, except as disclosed pursuant to Section 3.4(a) above, Contributor believes that
Contributor's Modifications are Contributor's original creation(s) and/or Contributor has sufficient rights to grant
the rights conveyed by this License.
3.5. Required Notices.
You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in each file of the Source Code. If it is not possible to put such notice in a
particular Source Code file due to its structure, then You must include such notice in a location (such as a relevant
directory) where a user would be likely to look for such a notice. If You created one or more Modification(s)
You may add your name as a Contributor to the notice described in Exhibit A. You must also duplicate this License
in any documentation for the Source Code where You describe recipients' rights or ownership rights relating to
Covered Code. You may choose to offer, and to charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations
to one or more recipients of Covered Code. However, You may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf of
the Initial
Developer or any Contributor. You must make it absolutely clear than any such warranty, support, indemnity or liabil-
ity obligation is offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor
for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of warranty, support, indemnity or lia-
bility terms You offer.
3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions.
You may distribute Covered Code in Executable form only if the requirements of Section 3.1-3.5 have been met for
that Covered Code, and if You include a notice stating that the Source Code version of the Covered Code is avail-
able under the terms of this License, including a description of how and where You have fulfilled the obligations of
Section 3.2. The notice must be conspicuously included in any notice in an Executable version, related documenta-
tion or collateral in which You describe recipients' rights relating to the Covered Code. You may distribute the
Executable version of Covered Code or ownership rights under a license of Your choice, which may contain terms
different from this License, provided that You are in compliance with the terms of this License and that the license
for the Executable version does not attempt to limit or alter the recipient's rights in the Source Code version from
the rights set forth in this
License. If You distribute the Executable version under a different license You must make it absolutely clear that any
terms which differ from this License are offered by You alone, not by the Initial Developer or any Contributor. You
hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial
Developer or such Contributor as a result of any such terms You offer.
3.7. Larger Works.
You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered Code with other code not governed by the terms of this
License and distribute the Larger Work as a single product. In such a case, You must make sure the requirements
of this License are fulfilled for the Covered Code.
4. Inability to Comply Due to Statute or Regulation.
If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms of this License with respect to some or all of the Covered
Code due to statute, judicial order, or regulation then You must: (a) comply with the terms of this License to the max-
imum extent possible; and (b) describe the limitations and the code they affect. Such description must be included in
the LEGAL file described in Section 3.4 and must be included with all distributions of the Source Code. Except to
the
extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such description must be sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary
skill to be able to understand it.
5. Application of this License.
This License applies to code to which the Initial Developer has attached the notice in Exhibit A and to related
Covered Code.
6. Versions of the License.
6.1. New Versions.
Netscape Communications Corporation ("Netscape") may publish revised and/or new versions of the License from
time to time. Each version will be given a distinguishing version number.
6.2. Effect of New Versions.
Once Covered Code has been published under a particular version of the License, You may always continue to use
it under the terms of that version. You may also choose to use such Covered Code under the terms of any subse-
quent version of the License published by Netscape. No one other than Netscape has the right to modify the terms
applicable to Covered Code created under this License.
background
199
APPENDIX
6.3. Derivative Works.
If You create or use a modified version of this License (which you may only do in order to apply it to code which is
not already Covered Code governed by this License), You must (a) rename Your license so that the phrases
"Mozilla", "MOZILLAPL", "MOZPL", "Netscape", "MPL", "NPL" or any confusingly similar phrase do not appear in
your license (except to note that your license differs from this License) and (b) otherwise make it clear that Your ver-
sion of the license contains terms which differ from the Mozilla Public License and Netscape Public License. (Filling
in the name of the Initial Developer, Original Code or Contributor in the notice described in Exhibit A shall not of
themselves be deemed to be modifications of this License.)
7. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY.
COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE
COVERED CODE IS FREE OF DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-
INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL
DEVELOPER OR ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE.
NO USE OF ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.
8. TERMINATION.
8.1. This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically if You fail to comply with terms here-
in and fail to cure such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach. All sublicenses to the Covered
Code which are properly granted shall survive any termination of this License. Provisions which, by their nature,
must remain in effect beyond the termination of this License shall survive.
8.2. If You initiate litigation by asserting a patent infringement claim (excluding declatory judgment actions) against
Initial Developer or a Contributor (the Initial Developer or Contributor against whom You file such action is referred
to as "Participant") alleging that:
(a) such Participant's Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then any and all rights granted
by such Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 of this License shall, upon 60 days notice from Participant
terminate prospectively, unless if within 60 days after receipt of notice You either: (i) agree in writing to pay
Participant a mutually agreeable reasonable royalty for Your past and future use of Modifications made by such
Participant, or (ii) withdraw Your litigation claim with respect to the Contributor Version against such Participant. If
within 60 days of notice, a reasonable royalty and payment arrangement are not mutually agreed upon in writing by
the parties or the litigation claim is not withdrawn, the rights granted by Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or
2.2 automatically terminate at the expiration of the 60 day notice period specified above.
(b) any software, hardware, or device, other than such Participant's Contributor Version, directly or indirectly
infringes any patent, then any rights granted to You by such Participant under Sections 2.1(b) and 2.2(b) are
revoked effective as of the date You first made, used, sold, distributed, or had made, Modifications made by that
Participant.
8.3. If You assert a patent infringement claim against Participant alleging that such Participant's Contributor Version
directly or indirectly infringes any patent where such claim is resolved (such as by license or settlement) prior to the
initiation of patent infringement litigation, then the reasonable value of the licenses granted by such Participant
under Sections 2.1 or 2.2 shall be taken into account in determining the amount or value of any payment or license.
8.4. In the event of termination under Sections 8.1 or 8.2 above, all end user license agreements (excluding distrib-
utors and resellers) which have been validly granted by You or any distributor hereunder prior to termination shall
survive termination.
9. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER
CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE,OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES,
BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF
ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK
STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR
LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY
RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY'S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH
LIMITATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
background
200
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
10. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS.
The Covered Code is a "commercial item," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of
"commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such terms are used in 48
C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June
1995), all U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein.
11. MISCELLANEOUS.
This License represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof. If any provision of this License
is held to be unenforceable, such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable. This
License shall be governed by California law provisions (except to the extent applicable law, if any, provides otherwise),
excluding its conflict-of-law provisions. With respect to disputes in which at least one party is a citizen of, or an entity
chartered or registered to do business in the United States of America, any litigation relating to this License shall be
subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the Northern District of California, with venue lying in Santa Clara
County, California, with the losing party responsible for costs, including without limitation, court costs and reasonable
attorneys' fees and expenses. The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale
of Goods is expressly excluded. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract shall be construed
against the drafter shall not apply to this License.
12. RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS.
As between Initial Developer and the Contributors, each party is responsible for claims and damages arising, direct-
ly or indirectly, out of its utilization of rights under this License and You agree to work with Initial Developer and
Contributors to distribute such responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing herein is intended or shall be deemed to
constitute any admission of liability.
13. MULTIPLE-LICENSED CODE.
Initial Developer may designate portions of the Covered Code as "Multiple-Licensed". "Multiple-Licensed" means
that the Initial Developer permits you to utilize portions of the Covered Code under Your choice of the NPL or the alter-
native licenses, if any, specified by the Initial Developer in the file described in Exhibit A.
EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License.
``The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this
file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the License.
The Original Code is ______________________________________.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is ________________________.
Portions created by ______________________ are Copyright (C) ______
_______________________. All Rights Reserved.
Contributor(s): ______________________________________.
Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of the _____ license (the "[___] License"), in
which case the provisions of [______] License are applicable instead of those above. If you wish to allow use of your
version of this file only under the terms of the [____] License and not to allow others to use your version of this file
under the MPL, indicate your decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice and other
provisions required by the [___] License. If you do not delete the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of
this file under either the MPL or the [___] License."
[NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly from the text of the notices in the Source Code files of the
Original Code. You should use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text found in the Original Code Source Code for
Your Modifications.]
background
background
202
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
Record the model number and serial number of
the TV.
Refer to the label on the back cover and quote
this information to your dealer when requiring
any service.
Model :
Serial No. :
Trade Mark of the DVB Digital Video
Broadcasting Project (1991 to 1996)
(Only DTV)

Specifications

Indexed Terms: 47 Inch

LG Electronics 47LE7500 Questions and Answers

Find answers or ask new question.
Questions and Answers

Related Products

Product LG Electronics 22LV2530 image
22LV2530 Lcd Tv - Televisions - - Lg Electronics Australia
2020-12-11 1 docs
Product LG Electronics 42LE7500 image
42LE7500 Lcd Tv - Televisions - - Lg Electronics Australia
2020-12-11 1 docs
Product LG Electronics 47LM6410 image
47LM6410 Lcd Tv - Televisions - - Lg Electronics Australia
2020-12-11 3 docs
Product LG Electronics 32LW4500 image
32LW4500 Lcd Tv - Televisions - - Lg Electronics Australia
2020-12-11 1 docs
Product LG Electronics 32LE5310 image
32LE5310 Lcd Tv - Televisions - - Lg Electronics Australia
2020-12-10 1 docs